^^^ IMHHM^IHR . > THE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES UWTJ , TE'XAS ' THE STYLE A Complete Stenographic Text-book. PITMAN SYSTEM. FOP Class, Correspondence and Self-Instruction. BY ELDON MORAN. AUTHOR THE "MOHAN SERIES " OF STENOGRAPHIC INSTRUCTION BOOKS AND riSESIDKNT AMERICAN HOME UNIVERSITY. THIRTY-KINTH EDITION MOBAN SHOKT-HAND COMPANY ST. Louis, U. 8. A. 1909 Popular Short-Hand Books. MOHAN -I'll MAN SERIES. Over 80,000 of these books have been sold. THE REPORTING STYLE - - 1.50 Complete text- book. Practical, theoretical and professional. 40,000 sold. 812 pages. KEY TO THE REPORTING STYLE" - 200 tugraved. POCKET SHORT-HAND DICTIONARY 1.00 Contains 0,000 engraved characters, for all doubtful words. SHORT-HAND STUDENTS MANUAL - 1.00 Amanuensis Course for high schools and "liDim- study." Simple and easy; best book for the average student- 144 pages. 100 VALUABLE SUGGESTIONS - 1.00 Practical and useful advice and information; serviceable to student, teacher and reporter. HIGHER LESSONS IN SHORT-HAND - .50 For advanced and professional work. SHORT-HAND SIGN-BOOK - - - .35 All word and phrase signs arranged alphabet- ically; flexible; vest-pocket edition. SHORT-HAND NUTSHELL - - - .25 The Pitman System boiled down. Graded Lesson Series; handy size. SHORT-HAND FOR BUSY PEOPLE - .10 Presents proper characters Jor all most fre- quently occurring words. Vest Pocket Booklet. SKILL CERTIFICATE, single copy five cents; per dozen .26 A pocket Diploma. Indicates student's qualifi- cations, speed and experience. INTRODUCTION CARD - - . .10 For stenographers and students who wish Short- hand correspondents. Published and for sale by THE MORAN SHORT-HAND CO Specimen Page* Frtt. ST. T,ouis. OOPYKIGHTID At this date, August, 1906, the 38th edition of the Reporting Style is printed. The publishers are grateful to the two hundred Teachers and College Proprietors who have seen fit to adopt this manual on its merits. Its novel features have been thoroughly tested, and its reputation estab- lished as a satisfactory exponent of the Pitman System, and a simple and practical text-book. The engraving is abundant and most excellent in quality. The subject is presented in an easy and progressive series of graded lessons. The learner is drilled in writing exercises which contain words most used in business correspondence. Permanent outlines only are given; that is, the student is never allowed to express any word by a long form which must after- wards be unlearned to give place for the short or reporting form. This is now universally regarded as the correct method. The explanation is simple, and the book is well adapted for use by young learners. An important advantage also possessed by but few such works, is that the subject is exhaustively treated in a single, compact volume. A key to all the exer- cises, both letter-press and engraved, has recently been pub- lished for the convenience of teachers, and as an aid to students who undertake self instruction. The series has just been further enriched also by the addition of a Pocket Dictionary containing engraved outlines for six thousand carefully se- lected words and phrases. Two improvements are made in the present edition : (1st) Four additional pages of practice matter are added in the early part. (2d) Many hyphens have been removed from the exerei.-es throughout, requiring a correspondingly less amount of phrasing. These two steps are taken most willingly in response to suggestions offered by many friendly critics. 448626 CONTENTS. Introduction - ... 5 Long and Short Hand Compared 10 General Directions - - - 11 Definition of Terms - - 18 LESSON'S. I. Consonant Alphabet, Sec 1- - - - 14 II. Consonant Alphabet, Sec. 2- - 16 III. Word-Signs - 22 IV. Bay (upward R) and Phrasing V. Long Vowels - 26 - 32 VI. Diphthongs and the S- Circle- VII. Short Vowels - VIII Consonant Position IX. S-Circle Junctions X. Phraseography - XI. Sez-Circle, Emp and Coalescents - - 64 XII. Double Consonants, the L-hook - - 70 Xin. R-hook Series, Div. 1 - 76 XIV. " " Div. 2- 80 XV. Triple Consonant Se- ries XVL Rel-hook, Aspirate Tick and Dot - XVIL W-hoofcs, Brief Way and Yay XVIII. F-hook ... XIX. N-hook - - - XX. " , Continued XXI. Shun-hook - - XXII. S-shun and In-hooks - 114 XXIIL St and Str Loops - - 118 XXIV. LengtheningPrinciple- 123 XXV. Halving Principle - 128 XXVI. Added D - 133 XXVII Shortened Double Con- - 84 - 88 y - 92 . % -100 - 104 -108 sonants - 138 XXVin. Half - length Final Hooked Stems- - 1-12 XXIX. Half-leugth L, R, M,N- 147 XXX Intervocalization - 152 XXXI. Prefixes - - . - 157 XXXII. Affixes - - - - 163 XXXIII. Variable Letters - - 167 XXXIV. Consonant Position - 1T3 XXXV. Vocalization - - - 182 XXXVL Primitive and Deriva- tive - - - - 192 XXXVTI. Syllabication - - - 200 XXXVIII General Principles - 805 XXXIX. Names and Negatives- 228 XL. Expedients and Punct- uation ... 227 XXI. Numbers, Special Rules and Suggestions - 232 XLII. Rules for Phrasing XLIII. Amanueusis Reporting- 251 XLIV. Continued XLV. Speech Reporting - XL VI. Convention Reportii^ XLVII. Law Reporting - - 209 XLVIU. Objections, Rulings, Ex- ceptions, Exhibits, and Indices - - 277 XXIX. Transcripts and Profes- sional Conduct - 285 L. Systems and Improve- ments - - - 290 Vocabulary - 2;c Spiritual Freedom - - - - 310 Fac-Similes 311 Notes, 21, 48, 62, 83, 87, 117, 126, 132, 137, 141, 156, 226. Suggestions to Teachers, 21, 30, 31, 37, 43, 49, 53. 63, 75, 91, 95, 103, 112, 113, 146. INTRODUCTORY. SYSTEM. This book presents what is known as the Amer- ican style of the Pitman System. Speaking broadly, we regard the Pitman as vastly superior to those few systems which differ radically from it, and a more desirable acquisi- tion than a knowledge of any one of the several others which are based directly upon it. For all English speaking coun- tries it is unquestionably the method of the future. TEACHING. The aim of this work is to pre.-ent the Pit- man System in the concrete not merely in the abstract; to teach the how of short-hand, rather than the why of it. The method of instruction employed is practical an, \ 5, | t t \ d, / ch, /j, are always struck downwards; but horizontal letters, as k, g, are written from left to right. The letters which prop- erly express the consonant sounds of a word, when connect- ed together, are called a word-form. This should be executed without lifting the pen from the paper, each successive letter being written in its proper direction, beginning where the preceding one ends. For illustration, see / check, (Line 10, Plate 1); / jap (L 11); Z-, jacket (L 12); \ page (L 18). In some N of these | words, &sjack- / et t it will be seen that one letter falls below the line; this is a common oc- currence, and quite necessary. The rule for placing letters is that the first downward letter should rest on the line. This requires that some letters be written one space above, as k in cage (L 13), which in this case is necessary in order that //i the first downward stroke, may rest on the line. De- vote leveral hours to this lesson. Copy Plate 1 twenty times. Remember the three rules: 1st. Practice. 2d. Practice! 8d. PRACTICE ! 10 Plate i. P-l B-2 T 3 -4 CH-5 J-6 K-7 G-8 i \ \ I / / - \\ I I // = * \\\\\ 1 1 1 1 I ///// 3 \\\\\ Mill ///// * \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ 5 II II | II II II II II II H \\ \\ \\ \\ 9 I I lOCh-K, check 11 J P jap 12J-K. T. , Z_ 13P-J. page ; K J. coge\ \ / \ / \ / 14 B-J. budge JB. job\ / \ / \ / \ / ~~J / / / / 15 J- K.Jack G-Ch. Gatch LESSON H. CONSONANT ALPHABET SECTION II. 4. Letters 11 and 12 (L 1, plate 2) are named ( ith and ( the, the first having the force of th in th-ink or bo-JA, and the second the force of th in th-em or brea-/A-e. ) Z (No. 14) has the force of z, and is equivalent to s in ha-s, wa-s, goe-s, etc. Letters 15 and 16 are designated _J ish and J zhe, the first having the power of sh in sh-a.ll or fi-sh, or of ci in vi-c*-ous; the second that of s in plea-s-ure or z in sei-2-ure. The name of the 17th letter is f~ lay. Letter 21, called N^'fngr, is used to express ng, as in si-<7, bri-ng, etc.; also n when it occurs before k or g, as in si--k, dri-n-k (pronounced si-n^-k, dri-n<7-k). Letters 22, 28 and 24 are named "^ way, f y a yi ) > 6 L-Y, R-W f f ^^ rr -^ rr ~\^ 7 M-H N-NG ^_^ <^ ^ ^ -^ * ^_- ^ 8 RM-ML "\_^ __y^ ^N ^ -y ~v^_/" 9 s-cn, J-M ^7 /^ ^ / 7 A VA VA 11 L-V, lovo; Il-T,hat / X \^ ^ ^ ?d }{ 1 ^V_ ^1 A. ^1 12 M-K-NG making ^_^ - ^ - ^ 13 P-K X-K picnicV^^^ v^ v__ ' 14 M M K mimic ^~^^-^_ --^^_ ^-^-^_ 15 c / r they /judge lake may deluge lovely lady 14 REPORTING 7. The pen may be held between the thumb and the first and second fingers, not far from the nib, and i" a nearly up- right position, as shown in fig. J (plate 2-B). Stenographers often hold their pen as shown in fig. K, and the student may sometimes adopt this manner with advantage. KEY TO PLATE 2-B. 8. Figures. A shows attitude of straight letters; B and C show direction of writing them, the rule being toward the centre; D, E, F and O show attitude and curvature of tin- bending stems ; H and 1 the direction of writing the curves ; / ^ / ( \ 6 /A Y 8ENTBNCB8 . (T) ^ _ \ | _ : (;( ) I r \ \ v, r L 20 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HANT). be written. For example, come should be written , never ^^ ; which / , never < /^> The word-signs given in each lesson should be / copied from fifty to one hundred times. In this way the pupil memorizes while learning to execute them. 18. Proper nouns are underscored with a short double dash, as shown in Alabama. L 5. 19. The tick at the beginning of h should be written in a horizontal position, and not inclined in such a manner as to form a hook, thus ^ It is sometimes inconvenient to write this tick when h is not the first consonant in the word. In such cases it is clearly enough indicated by retracing the preceding letter a short way, as in behead. L 5. 20. A single movement of the pen is sufficient to indicate duet, or keg, and similar words, the stroke tapering or thickening gradually. L 5. The letter I is sometimes writ- ten downward (as in vowel, manual, L 7), and is then called el to distinguish it from lay (upward). Sh when struck up- ward is called shay. (See bishop, L 7). Always use lay and ish, unless eJand shay are specified. 21. One of the purposes in sometimes using el instead of lay, and shay instead of ish, is to secure better, that is sharp- er, angles at their junctures with other letters. The legibil- ity of an outline depends to a large extent upon its angular- ity. For this reason a distinct angle should be made in joining ( ith and V^ 3/*, V_ efand ^_^en, ( ith and ^^ing, (as in \^_x nothing), and other letters making similar junctions. 22. The participial ending i-n-g, is usually denoted by the consonant ^^ng. In some cases it is more convenient to express ing by placing a large dot, its affix sign, at the end ot the word, as in doing, helping, paying. (L 6.) The dot should be used in all cases where the use of the stem ng re- sults in a word-form that is either awkward or unangular. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. The dot, however, cannot be used for ing, the final letters of some nouns, as th-ing, noth-ing. 23. Speed in short-hand is of no consequence unless what is written can be read afterwards. Legibility, or read-ability, depends in part upon the accurate forming of the characters. To do this it is not necessary to write them slowly ; oa the contrary, experienced stenographers produce the more per- fect outlines with a somewhat rapid movement, just as an experienced penman executes the most graceful curve by a quick stroke, rather than by slowly drawing it. The student should learn at the outset to write the characters, rather than draw them. Nevertheless, the beginner needs time at first, and ought to form each character a number of times with care and deliberation, until the proper outline is firmly impressed upon his mind, before attempting to write it quickly. Afterwards write it rapidly, and continue doing so until it can be formed both accurately and quickly. All beginners form the characters too large, and are apt to place them too far apart. A great saving of time, and a consequent gain in speed, will be the result in the long run, if the words are written both small and closely together. The learner should begin acquiring this habit now. The light letters should be quite thin, and very little shading will be found sufficient to distinguish the heavy strokes. EXERCISE 3. 24. 1 Wait 2 bulk 3 depth 4 effect 5 effigy 6 error 7 wade 8 fare 9 dare 10 farm 11 remedy 12 policy 13 agency 14 enough 15 army 16 delay 17 am v 18 waking 19 engage 20 image 21 inform 22 invoke 23 know 24 comic 25 shadow 26 share 27 baggage 28 bath 29 below 30 betime 31 buffalo 32 cab 33 detail 34 dig 35 dull 36 fair 37 far 38 fellow 39 gash 40 gum 41 gush 42 hack 43 honey 44 lavish 45 levity 46 link 47 log 48 monk 49 omit 50 pair 51 pang 52 remove 53 shake 54 sham ^ 55 shove 56 going 57 tank 68 thief 59 tick 60 timid 61 top 62 vacate 63 fatigue 64 Jacob 65 Matthew 66 Lilly 67 Lucy 68 Dakota 69 Dick 70 Jack. Using shay (upward), 71 fish 72 dish 73 push. (733:302.) LESSON IV. BAT (OB UPWABD R), AND PHRASE WRITING. 25. KET. 1. Arc wreck ferry forehead tyranny herb rub Rachel allegory. 2. Heretic retire repair are-many I-say I-shall I-guide I-do I-am. 8. He-may he-will he- may-have he-was he-has-no he-is making he-is-never he- became he-is v he-has. 4. You-will you-know will-you- come ,are-you-ready ,you-may-go as-many-as v as-long-as. WORD-SIGNS. 5. In that I is his as, has notwithstand- ing you, are. rather, represent. 6. Regular irregular leg- ible illegible dignity reform perform essential peculiar. 7. Magazine magnanimous New York republic majesty do-as-you as-you-will which-is-so. SENTENCES. 1. Timothy married Rachel for-love. 2. They live in Alabama. 8. Jacob married Ruth for- money. 4. They live in Tennessee. 6. That match was foolish. 6. They both do wrong. 7. They may move into Dakota for health. 8. Tom will avenge that wrong. 9. I-admire them-that-are upright. 10. I-abhqr them-that do wrong for pay. 11. It-will-be no advantage for-them, notwithstanding they-may become rich. 26. / Ray. R is more commonly expressed by a straight upward stroke, called ray, than by the downward curve ~^\ or. There are three reasons for this; 1st, ray is more quickly written; 2nd, it more frequently secures angularity of out- line; 3rd, it prevents many words from extending too far below the line. The student will hereafter use ray in all cases where ar is not specified. 27. Phrasing. In short-hand two or more commonly re- curring words are often written together without the pen being lifted from the paper. A series of words which may thus be joined is called a phraseogram, and the character which expresses them, a phascograph; thus the words, you- may-go, constitute a phraseogram, while the character rv ^~ >ta is termed a phraseograph. Much speed is gained by phrasing, with no sacrifice of legibility. 22 Plate 4. > , VI o WORD-SIGNS. ( V O O 8ENTKNCES. ( A \ 4- Y /\ "7 i V" VI \ I 24 REPORTING STYLE OF STWRT-IIAXD. ( I. In phraseography, only half the sign for "I" is commonly written, whichever of the two "ticks" ' or ', makes the best angle with the word to which it is joined; c. (/., in l- n and ng. In begin- ning a word, either r makes a distinct angle by junction with a following k, g, \ p or \ 6. In such cases ~^\ ar is used if the vowel precedes it, as in arc, or herb; when no such vowel occurs, / ray is employed, as in wreck, or rub. H at the end of words is usually struck upward if followed by a final vowel, as in ferry. See L 1. 33. Write, using ray: 1 Ring 2 road 3 revive 4 reveal (el) 6 revenue 6 ready 7 repeal 8 rash 9 rate 10 range 11 wrong 12 abhor 13 birth 14 bureau 15 arrive 16 earth 17 march 18 mark 19 marry 20 married 21 marriage 22 memorial (el) 23 merry 24 admire 25 memory 26 mirror 27 narrow 28 notary 29 period 30 perish 31 rare 32 rarefy 33 injury 34 theory 35 thorough 36 tornado 87 variety 38 victory 39 hurry 40 poetry 41 Arizona 42 arch 43 burial (el) 44 bury 45 carry 46 cherry 47 forge 48 harsh 49 horror 50 inferior 51 morrow 52 ravage 53 red 54 jury 55 review 56 write 57 repel 58 revenge 59 revoke 60 revolve 61 rich 62 tardy 63 terror 64 torch 65 upright 66 urge 67 vary 68 verify 69 votary 70 wrath 71 wretch 72 notoriety 73 Darius 74 Ezra 75 Mark 76 Theodore 77 Mary 78 Marion 79 Rachel 80 Rosa 81 Ruth 82 Barrett. (8231:30) PHRASES. 34. As-he as-it-was do-so do-that do-they has-that have-also have-become have-long I-am-also I-am-ready I-became I-have I-know-that I-was in-any in-his in-it in-any-way in-them in -which in-your may-have may-never take-it take-that take-them it-was. 26 EXPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. EXERCISE 4. 85. 1. He-may-think he-is wrong. 2. Are-you-ready? 8. I-am hurrying notwithstanding your delay. 4. I-ain-going into New- York. 5. He-will argue it. 6. 1-shall reform them. 7. I-think he-will-be popular enough as deputy. 8. I-say Tom will-do nothing for-them. 9. I-will inform-you that-it- may do for March, never for November. 10. His daily income will make-him rich enough. 11. I judge that Theodore will go up into Dakota. 12. Among so-many your book will-have noadvantage. 13. Ezra Barrett is rather peculiar. 14. They- may never do-so. 15. Darius will-never march any regular army into Arizona. 16. As-you-may know his help as usual is efficient. (11841:15) 86. SPEED SENTENCE. You-may-keep your March-maga- zine for Tom Meredith. (4 1) To THE TEACHEB. Young pupils, or those not accustomed to handling a pen, find curves more difficult than straight items. If in the student's work these letters present an ir- regular or cramped appearance, the teacher may require additional practice in curved outlines, as m-l-l, n-f-l, sh-m-l, m-n-l-r, etc. Extended practice in writing these and similar outlines over and over again many times, will tend to render the curves flowing and even. Require every pupil to write mostly with a pen; pencil work should be the exception. See to it that, in each case, the pen is of the proper stiffness to enable the pupil to do the best work. Nor should the learner ever I e allowed to use a cheap quality of paper; he will do bad work, make poor progress, and get discouraged. It is true economy to use the very best materials only. The paper should always be ruled; but double ruling is not neces- sary or best, except as a guide to those just beginning who write too large a hand. Heavy foolscap is very suitable; but when the lines are far apart the characters should occu- py less than half the space between them. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. READING PRACTICE. The amount of this that may be neces- sary will depend on yourself. If you read your own writ- ing with difficulty, you should practice only so much the more. Those who employ their time mainly in writing, with a view of gaining speed, producing inaccurate and misshapen characters which they rarely attempt to read, may rest assured that they are making progress backwards instead of forwards. When all the list words of a single lesson have been carefully written, they should then be read over and over again, until the whole can be rendered in the time indicated. EDUCATIONAL VALUE OF SHORT-HAND. Short-hand is not only valuable as a profession ; it is equally useful as an accom- plishment. No thinking man can afford to be without this rapid method of transferring his thoughts to paper. By means of it, first draughts of letters and articles are made, and notes of lectures, business transactions, and private memoranda recorded, much more fully and in but a fraction of the time otherwise required. Its great utility, both as a discipline and personal convenience, is abundantly attested by literary men of note who are skilled in its use. QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. Which letters are written downwards? In what direction is k written? What other letters are written in the same direction? In Notary (n-t-ray), which letter is placed on the base-line? Name all the letters which are written up- wards. Spell exquisite stenographically. Name five sign- words from memory. How are proper names signified? What class of words are represented by word-signs? In what two ways may the syllable i-n-g be expressed? In what respects are ray and chay unlike? Name three words in which ray is used; three words iu which ar is used in preference to ray. Name the letters of the alphabet consec- utively. TICKS. KEY. 1. I-think I-have I-take I-will I-live I-write I-know I-may I-say I-was. 2. He-came he-is-in he-has-no he-has-it he-is-a he-has-a as-he-may he-and-I he-and-you he- is- so. 3. And-a and-the and-he-may and-I and-you and- he-is and-it-is and-make and-do and-which. 4. And-will and-also and-think and-for and-I and- that and-is and-his and-as and-have. 6. A-long a-day a-time an-advantage in-a is-a as-a which -a for-a was-a. 6. The-time the-advantage the-long the-jury the- name in -the for- the have -the is -the as -the. ':. That-is-the that-is-a as-he-is as-I-am as-he-was is-he-so is-he-making as-he-may as-he-has do- as- he. LONG VOWELS. 8. Eke key fee eave Lee ear bee eel ease pea. 9. Abe age jay fay ray shay lay May nay hay. 10. Taw awed daw caw saw law raw maw Orr haw. 11. Toe owed Coe go oath sow show roe o re ohm. 12. Pooh coo woo pa ma bah fa shah la ha. 13. Otho Eno array Ora Asia Eva Oho Esau ado era. 14. Maul balk tame leech mole dope keel Jake poach hoop. 15. Toto Dora Como Mocha Tokay Roma \ awake Polo delay obeyed. PRACTICAL TEST. After having studied the Ticks and Long Vowels, and copied the Exercise opposite several times, the student is recommended to write off in Short- hand all the matter on this page, comparing his work af- terwards character by character with the engraved plate. Continue copying and comparing while mistakes are found. 2S- 1_ ") . 5 _17 X / <, i W^ #-^ f \> .r > \ C S ,- "^ ^ " I- -I -C )- A ^ ^ ^ ~*i A y v. ^ )" L-'X LESSON V. LONG VOWELS. 87. KEY. 1. Eat key peak oak hoe coach peer par park. 2. Coop raw pshaw beach tame calm Maude yoke pool. 8. The-loaf the-porch and-a and-the a-book-and a-guide to-day to-morrow. SENTENCES. 1. The-yoke is heavy. 2. It-is-a loaf of dough. 8. It-may thaw before to-morrow. 4. Who-will make-a bowl of tea? 5. Take-the pole and-leap on to-the porch. 6. Sheep ought-never to roam too far. 7. Your yellow pony is calm notwithstanding all-the uproar. 8. The-knavishhawk has both a-beak and-a tail. 88 \ \ \. r i- i. Bee bay bah taw toe too Me may ma caw coe coo 39. The six long vowels are denoted by a large dot and dash placed beside the consonant signs at three different points, called thejlrst, second, and third vowel places, being respectively at the beginning, middle and end of the stem. The long sound of e is expressed by putting a large dot in the first place, or at the beginning of the stem, as in bee, me, eat or key; the long sound of o by writing the dash in the second place, or at the middle of the letter, as in toe, coe, oak, or hoe. See L 1. 40. An easy way to remember the long vowels, and the order of their occurence, is to memorize the following rhyme: In th-e g-ay c-a-r S-ee gr-ay Cz-a-r. In sm--ll g-o-ld b-oo-ts T-a-11 d-o-e sh-oo-ts. 41. A word is said to be vocalized when the vowel signs are added to its outline. A Nominal Consonant is any letter, as I t or k cancelled, its office being simply to indicate vow- el place when words having no consonant are to be written as ./ ah or ' / awe. -30 J $late 5. < 7 V TTOKD-SKiNS. the ought a an and / already before oh of to g ' . . ^ SENTENCES. (V) u c , su v TRANSLATE. ( 1 who all two 1 too \ / \ \ or but on should v/* x r V - x L, XV ) V - 32 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 42 .A B C 1st place. aw s 1st a 1st 2d 3d \ 2d place. o > ah ah 3d place. ow o oo oo \x3d e / -;3d. 3d. 1st. 43. These dots and dashes, or the sounds they represent, are denominated first, second, and third place vowels, accord- ing as they occupy the first, second, or third positions. By noticing Figures A B C D, above, it will be seen that a first-place vowel is written at the beginning, and a third-place at the end of the stem, no matter whether the con- sonant is written downward, upward or to the right. The base-line has nothing whatever to do in determining the place of the vowel signs. 44. In *| eat and i oak the vowels e and o precede the consonants | t and A;,- hence the dot and dash are writ- ten before the stems, e being placed at the left of /, and o abore k. In |- toe and key, the vowels come last, and for this reason o is placed after, or on the right side of t, in the first word, and e after or below k, in the second. 45. Dash vowels ure written so as :c stand out from the stems beside which they are placed, as for example, in oak and raw the dashes o and aw are placed zz right angles with k and r. 46. Attention is called to the manner of writing peer and par in L 1. If to the word \. pa, r should be added, the character \ 5 / x par would the result. Bu f if to the word ./ eer, p should be prefixed, the result would be \ 5 ^/' peer, written precisely the same as par. just shown. Placing vowels in angles renders the meaning uncertain, and is alao inconvenent. To avoid this it is necessary to obsi-rvo the rule that when a third-place dot or dash occurs between two consecutive consonants.it is annexed to the second, no f , to theirs/. For example the first place vowel.- inbeach an^. Maude, and the second place vowels in tame and yoke (L 2) ai'o REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 33 placed beside the first consonant, while the third place vowels in coop andpool (L 2) are written beside the second. The rule holds good whether a sharp angle occurs between the two stems or not; thus calm is written ^~^*, and not 47. Caution The student must njt forget that short- hand is Avritten *>y sound. Vowels in the sense here used do not refer to the letters, a, e, i, etc., but to the vowel sounds that are actually heard in the distinct utterance of any word. Hence, to write a word properly, no regard whatever should be had to its spelling. In yoke, for instance, there is but one vowel, that of o long; final e, being silent, is not rep- resented. A good plan is to speak each word aloud before writing it; or better s'Jll, have the list distinctly pronounced to you by another person. 48. Remark. Only one 0ut of many hundreds of vowels is actually written in taking short-hand notes; but enough more are indicated by the manner of combining the conso- nant signs, to render the system entirely legible. The possi- bility of reading almost solely from the consonants may be shown by the fact that a page of print is easily decipherable, all the vowels having been previously blotted out; for in such cases the consonant element, which is the more impor- tant, still remains, and the blots indicate where the vowels are to be supplied. This crudely, and very inadequately, il- lustrates the method employed in short-hand. 49. The vowels are used rarely; nevertheless they must be thoroughly mastered, in order that they may be inserted without a moment's hesitation when a rapid report is being made. The pupil is cautioned against forming the long-vow- el signs too small, a common error, which results in confus- ing them with short vowels. The word-signs in this lesson are difficult. The memory will be aided by observing that each one is in fact the prin- cipal vowel-sign in the word it represents. They are given different positions for the sake of distinction. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-IIAXD. 50. THE. Any one of the three ticks which denote 1 or he may also be used to indicate the, that one always being selected which secures the best angle. This tick has no posi- tion of its own. In the-porch, and the-loaf (L 3), the is iirst written above, and then on the line. 51. A, an, and, in phrasing are all denoted by a brief tick, written horizontally or vertically (downward), as angle may require, as in a-book-and a-guide. See L 3. When cither tick maybe used, the horizontal should' be given the prefer- ence. 62. The tick signs for a, an, and, and the are more com- monly used; the dots being written when a tick is inconven- ient, or does not join well. The pupil should guard against the common error of forming these ticks too large; make them as short and light as possible. 53. The words which in this book the pupil is required to vocalize, are the very ones which will be most likely to re- quire vowels when regular reporting work is to be done. A fuller explanation of this subject will be found in Lesson 35 Vocalize the following list, observing the rule explained in section 46 above. In the last three lines the long vowels only are to be written. 54. 1 Ate tea ace. saw sea low oaf foe ail ache gay 2 aid dough awl ale lea ape Poe paw Joe shoe A 3 thaw jaw aim woe gnaw knee nay Esau oar (ar) era 4 (ar) ado age aught fee hay oat ode sew. 5 (1st place) Cheek chalk heap heed tall leaf leap 6 meal peal bawl beak beam beer hawk deal kneel (el) 7 leak peach reap sheep team teeth wreath wreathe 8 Neal (el) Paul. 9 (2nd place) Cake coach coal comb dale dame bail bowl 10 cape joke fame gale game jail choke knave lame 11 loaf nail (el} pole porch vale abate bore (ar) roam (ar) 12 rogue rope babe bait poll dome goal loathe pail 13 poke pope rake robe tale tape vague Job. 14 (3d place) Tool root balm mar doom rood tomb; (us- 15 ing ar) lark tar czar tour jar. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 35 16 (Long vowels only) Antique aurora (ar) boquet foliage 17 elate jubilee oatmeal parade pillow pony potato up- 18 roar yellow Ada Cora Edith Eva Laura Nora lower 19 (ar) (1406:452:45). /^"55. PHRASES. All-are all-his all-my all-right ail-that all-the-way all-which all-you all-your and-have as-it-should r'TSefore-his before-the before-you but-a but-may but-that , but-the but-as for-a for- which has-a have-a of-that of- the-way in-the-way of-theni on-that should-be should-do should-never should-have take-the to-him to-live to-love- ~them too-many who-may who-was. EXERCISE 5. 56. 1. The-day is coming and you-may-look for-a vic- tory before-long. 2. Should-you-come to-day Maude and- Laura will-make a-boquet and-an. antique foliage wreath for-you. 3. Are-you-going to-go to sea to-day? 4. Paul, take your oar and-go-and row a-league. 5. The-knave is taking coal into-the coach. 6. They-have-a tall coop in-the park. (652:301). 57. Speed Sentence. Cora, you-may-go and help Laura make oatmeal cake for tea. (3 1). ^To THE TEACHER. The young learner and the adult stu- dent take hold of short-hand in a manner entirely different. The young pupil does not execute so well, but takes more de- light in the merely mechanical operation of writing and re- writing the characters many times. The older person forms the outlines better, but dislikes practice. He prefers to study, while the young student would much rather spend his time writing. This is why in the long run the young succeed best. Short-hand writing is something to be done, not mere- ly thought about; learning the art requires the application of the hand more than the head. LESSON VI. DIPHTHONGS AND THE S-CIRCLE. 58. KEY. 1. Type voice vow boy oil cow Illinois wide. 2. Spy sauce doze ooze sow seed Saul snail assignee. 3. Spell search goes zinc zeal sense Tom's bells ring. 4. Owing owes owed wipe wife Viola loyal twice surveyor. 5. PHKASES. As-far-as as-far-as-may be-such does-he does-never how-many in-any-case has-he. 6. WOKD-SIGNS. How high now its several special subject advantageous always. 7. Knowledge acknowledge January February electricity something sufficient forsake for-the-sake-of. SENTENCES. 1. The-savage toils a-long-time before-he slays the shy fowl. 2. The-slave knows how to sail the-big ship on-the sea. 3. But-the voyage to Hayti will-be too-long for-the boy Guy. 4. Rufus may-make many rhymes, but it-was Poe who wrote the rich poetry which all admire. 5. James, do-you think it will tire you to carry this wide vase two-miles? 6. I-think all of-your boys ought-to come to-the service on Sunday. DIPHTHONGAL SCALE. 59 - ; v I as in n-t-ght. ; A oi in c-ot'-l. | A ow in end-ow. J L wi in wi-pe. The diphthongs i, oi, and ow are represented by angular signs as shown in type, voice, vow. L 1. They always point either up or down, no matter whether the consonant beside which they are placed is slanting or otherwise, /may be written in the 1st, 2nd or 3rd vowel place, according to convenience, as in spy. L 2. 60. The triphthong wi and the three dipthongal signs, may occasionally be joined to consonant letters at the be- ginning or end of words, as in oil, cow, wide. (L 1). When A medial, however, they cannot be joined; thu-. f cowl 36 Plate 6. \ C ), T 3 V \ rttHASKS P \ I I A / * J^N ' WimU-SHJNS. \ ES. (T) / s r x> r fe) f ^ \ / XI 1 V^ vW^i \, 448626 REPORTING STYLE OF SffOBT-HAXJ). cannot be written A/*" since this character would be ambiguous, expressing either cowl or coil. 61. THE CIRCLE. S and z are denoted in outlines by a small circle. This, when joined to curved letters, is written within or following the direction of the curve, as in sense, or bells. L 3. 62. When the circle is attached to a straight letter, at the beginning or end of a word-form, it is always written upon the right of the letter if downward, as in spell; on the left of upward letters, as in search; and upper side of horizontal let- ! ters, as in goes. See L 3. 63. The following table, which illustrates the proper man- ner of attaching the circle to straight and curved stems, should be copied many times, until the pupil can, without taking thought, execute it properly. Written exercises should be compared with it every day until errors cease to be found. When joined to straight letters the circle is struck with a h-ft movement, as the letter o is written in long-hand. This rule will enable the learner to test the accuracy of his writing. For Jbtinction, s when represented by the circle, is called iss. and the combined characters | , f , b , etc., may be named either iss-te, iss-de, de-iss, or ste, sed, des, etc. 64. TABLE OF 8-CIRCLE JOININGS. \> Xb b / Q-Di-oVoVoC 3 3 6 d<3~OQ-PQ-p C> ^^ 65. S and z being cognates, are both expressed by a sin- gle sign, namely the circle, with no danger of ambiguity. The circle is not employed *o denote z when it begins ;i word as in zinc, zeal. L 3. 66. The possessive or plural of sword, formed in long- hand by the addition of s or es, is indicated in short-hand by affixing the s-circle to its word-sign, or outline, as in Tom's bells ring. L 3. 67. S and z when standing alone, as in ooze or sow, can- REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 30 not be represented by the circle, which it is impossible to vocalize. L 2. .p 68. The character | is read seat, the order of pronunci- ation being, first, the circle; second, the vowel; and third, the stem. 8 is read first, although e is actually placed be- fore, that is, at the left, of it. If e should be read first, the word would be east; but this plan would be worse, since the circle cannot be vocalized. The stem J s would have to be employed in east, as in all words where s is preceded by a vowel. See seed, Saul, L 2. 69. The vowel word-signs i but and ' or are not com- monly phrased; for, since a and and are written in the same manner, ambiguity would be the frequent result; thus, l would express either and-go, or but-go, and / either or. acknowledge, or and-acknowledge. 70. Caution. Beginners are disposed to write the s-circle too large. There is very little danger of getting it too small. The diphthongal signs should be made light, rather small and sharp-angled. The word -sign n you should be a complete semi-circle, and quite small; not large and flattened out, thus /> 71 . In forsake, composed of for and sake, the letter V^ / is used for the first part because it is the sign for the word /or. But in \^y forage, which is in no wise a com- pound word, the first syllable for cannot be expressed by V^ simply. The learner is cautioned against using word-signs in any way, except to express just those words which they ^taeeintended to represent. 72. 1 % Using diphthongs, write: Tie pipe vile knife 2 mile defy boil coil foil row toy vouch Guy buy die ^JJ__chime couch coy dike fowl hide nigh owl foul pike 4 pile rhyme shy sigh spike dye thigh tire (ar) toil annoy 5 diet envoy royal Isaac sour (ar). Using dot vowels 6 also; tU Elijah Eliza Ida Myra. ,. . 40 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-I1AXD. 7 Using the s-circlc: Case safe save sale sake said 8 same famous fix harness immense less Sabbath safety 9 savage scale (el) sell senate sketch service summer de- 10 vise refuse police story soon small smith son smoke 11 solid slave suppose spell study Sunday space this yes 12 Saturday cell cemetery notice sex sink skip sledge slim 13 sling slip spark spool such sun surface/surge surpass 14 survey swing Swiss valise stay wages wax Horace 15 James Rufus Samuel Thomas; (using ar) cellar Caesar 16 force spare sir circus. 17 Vocalize: Lace seal seat site slow snow sail race 18 choose dose abase choice geese gaze spoil vice pause 19 seam scene raise voice invoice nice noise soul chase 20 cheese dice entice sage sauce siege slay vase sleeve 21 slope sly snail (el) snake soap sole sty repose Miles 22 (using ar) soar score spire. (168 6 3:15). 73. PHRASES. All-such all-this be-said be-ihis before- this do-such do-this does-it does-that does-the does-this does-your for-such for-this has-this have-them have-such have-this how-may in-its-own in-this is-this it-make 8 such- was to-his to-this which-has which-makes. EXERCISE 6. 74. 1. That boy of-yours makes enough noise. 2. Do- you say he-is going to tie the-rope to-the cow's neck? 8. He ought to-make less noise so that-he-may keep his seat in-the Senate. 4. May honesty be-your policy notwith- standing your name may become less famous. 5. I- will help-you take-an invoice of all-your-stock. 6. You-should never for any reason or on-any day make-a foolish vow. 7. Do-you endorse the study of-such-a subject as-this? 8. Yes, and I-think you-should study it thoroughly oq-all days but Sundays. 9. I-suppose you-will make-it your special object to know it all before the-month of November. 10. Several boys have come to-day to-sell milk. 11. You-will have-no magazine for sale in-this language for-several days. 12. It-was said in-the Senate of-Illinois that for the space REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. of two days all bells should ring the-alarm. 13. The Sen- ate of-this republic will long be famous for-its safe and-dig- nified policy. (175-52). 75. SPEED SENTENCE. How- many-days do-you suppose he- will-be in surveying enough space for-the cemetery? (5-1) 76. TRANSLATE. ^ \o \ / VP 6 V^ 8 x 2 \o '-N, / ^ . W_ ^ , 3 ( I / , A_P > M C \ . * C, ^*rs_ r ^r r *y > n/x ^_^ *- \ \ ^ r ' M.X c F ^ _^n^-^\cv_A To THE TEACHER. To the novice the short-hand letters a r e all very much alike in appearance. By holding up to th-e learner the features of dissimilarity, each individual let- ter will be more quickly recognized, and firmly fixed. The elementary characters may be differentiated in the follow- ing manner: Consonants. These may be classified, 1st, (on the basis of form) into straight and curved; 2nd, (as to size) into light and heavy, 3rd, (as to attitude) into vertical, hor- izontal and oblique. Vowels. These are, 1st, long and short; 2nd, light and heavy; 3rd, first, second and third place; 4th, dots, dashes and angles; 5th, simple and diphthongal. DIPHTHONGS. KEY. 1. Pie gibe Ike fie vie ice eyes isle lie rye. 2. Foy roy hoy bough Dow ouch mow wow Howe cite. 3. Seip spice sty Tice guise scythe sire mice sine hies. 4. Joyce soil Royce spouse douse scow sour rouse mouse ounce. 5. Slice Sepoy Sinai Eli silo solo Iva Ina Isa Rio. SHORT VOWELS. 6. Dick Jim jig itch dig fib Fitch fig rid lid. 7. Mill nib gib kip lick myth nick nip pig ship. 8. Chess deck ebb Ed etch ledge neck peck peg sedge. 9. Hess Jess knell mesh check chef ell Israeli wreck shed. 10. Add ash rash chap rap fang batch jam lamb ram. 11. Map Mab match Madge mack lang rat nab nag rag. 12. Knob notch mock lop cop Lodge rock top rod rob. 13. Bus fuss gum lull cubj muff muss rug rum rung. 14. HUBS mush mum nudge Russ rush rut rub sup sub. 15. Puss nook rook shook muddy ferry folly funny volley shadow. TEST EXERCISE. The learner is recommended to copy the engraved exercise on the page opposite a number of times. Then write in Short-hand the entire list of words given above and compare your work with the engraving Repeat the operation several times if errors are found As a flnal test, transcribe the engraved exercise into long- hand. Compare your transcript with the key printed above, mark your mistakes and try again. v c L A X / L s/ L \ I / /7 *>/ r 9 z 10. 1 ii S\ /\ \ LESSON VII. SHORT VOWELS. 77. KEY. 1. Big job beg cup tack shaggy echo poem fiat. 2. Assail lazy rose rosy sense essence race racy. 3. Herb Arab array audit borrow buggy cameo elbow. 4. WORD-SIGNS. We with were would what New- York-City public publish-ed for-the-purpose-of. 5. PHRASES. As-we for-we-were were-it what-is-it what-would-be with-advantage would-know would-rather. 6. As-to-do he-should-be for-his-purpose how-much how- you think-you-may what-it-is does-nothing. 7 and 8. For key see list words sec 86. SENTENCES. 1. I-saw him buy a tall silk hat. 2. We shall soon dig a ditch along the road. 3. Samuel Adams will lay a gas pipe in-it. 4. What-would you-like to-have to eat? 5. Now you-may-make some coffee to-take to-the picnic. 6. I-will also boil some cabbage and-take some mellow peaches. 7. They-may thiuk-that-we live in-a palace. 78. SHORT-VOWEL SCALE. | it [ et ,| at I ot | ut I oot (as in f-oo-t). The six short vowels here illustrated are indicated by a small light dot and dash written in the three vowel places. For example, a light dot when written in the second place has the force of e in beg, and a light dash the same power as u in cup (L 1). A light dash, first place, is equivalent to o in job. The learner will observe that the short vowel signs are quite small. This is necessary to render them easily distinguishable from the long. These mnemonical rhymes will aid in recollecting the short vowels, and the order in which they occur : j Bill gets bat; j Lot cuts wood. I Kills red rat. j Dot does good. 79. By referring to L 1 the pupil will see that in tack and shaggy the third-place vowels are located beside the second Plate 7, L /, _ Q_9 <_P WORD-SIGNS. PHRASES. e SENTENCES X> A T \ onniaira y:-.i i v / \ T ^ v . r ^ L J C n u V 46 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND consonant, rather than the first. This is according to the rule governing third-place vowels, occuring between t\\<> consonants. Second-place short vowels, also, are appended to the second stem, and in this respect the rule differs from that governing second-place long vowels, which, it will be remembered, are written by the first consonant. The fol- lowing figures illustrate the entire rule, and will aid in remembering it. The numbers 1, 2, 3, represent first, second and third-place vowels, those that are long being signified by the full-faced type. 80. A .B C D 81. This rule for placing vowels, both long and short, between two consecutive consonants, may be briefly stated as follows : Write beside the 1st consonant : Beside the 2nd consonant : First-place long vowels, Second-place short vowels, First-place short vowels, Third-place sho rt vowels, Second-place long vowels. Third-place long vowels. Stated in the fewest possible words, the rule is : Second-place long and all first-place vowels are written by the first stem, and all others by the second. 82. Besides keeping vowels out of angles, a further ad- vantage of this rule is that second-place vowels, though they be insufficiently or wrongly shaded, are known by the tion they occupy by the first or second consonant ; thus would be read bake, because the writer evidently meant to make the dot large, since it occupies a position where a large dot only could properly be placed. For a similar reason, the character \ . would be read beck. The few exceptions to this rule are given in lesson XXXV. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 47 83. The vowel in herb (L 3) is represented by a second- place dot, rather than the light dash. Strictly, however, the e in herb (and words where it occurs before r) is not the same as e in met, or u in cup, although the dot, rather than the dash, is used in such cases. Other shades of vowel sound, also, are unprovided for in the Scale ; but for all practical purposes these are indicated clearly enough by the signs for those vowels which most nearly approach them. r 84. In |~ Dio it is necessary to place two vowels on one side of a letter. Here v t is put nearer to | d than - o, since the symbols should be written in the same order in which the sounds occur. See also cameo, L 3. When two concurrent vowels occur between two conso- nants, the first vowel is placed by the first stem, and the second by the last, without reference to what place either of the vowels may occupy. See poem, fiat, L 1. 85. Since every vowel is of necessity in the first, second or third place, the stem ) s must be written if a vowel occurs in connection with it ; for if a dot or dash were placed beside a circle, there would be nothing to show whether a first, second, or third-place vowel were meant. Hence if s is pre- ceded by an initial, or followed by a final vowel, the full-length stem, instead of the circle, must invariably be used. See assail, lazy, racy, L 2. This rule holds good in all cases whether tlie vowels are actually written or not, since the use of the stem in these circumstances indicates where the reader is to supply them. For example, the circle is used in sense and rose, but the stem must be employed in essence and rosy. See L 2. 86. 1 Write : 111 kick lock rock chorus edge egg else 2 gui,ss kiss mass haughty enemy alas Asia gem valley 3 malice autumn lion idiom idiot maniac mazy dozy 4 posy daisy gauzy dizzy hazy noisy espy acme agony 5 allure ally alto apex dock appease bang botch chip 6 chop cob coffee dairy duck dumb Lutch epic essay 48 REPORTING STYLE OF SfTORT-ffAXI). 7 foggy gang gas gaudy hobby mug lag lap pack lash 8 latch lath leg lip luck lung mellow mess mob odd 9 opera palace palm pith rack shock silk solemn Stoic 10 tally Adam Amos Ellis Emory Jesse Agnes Anna 11 Ella Emily Emma Hannah (using ar) arrow attire err. (9662) 87. PHRASES. And-we as-it-should for- we have- we such-as that-you we-do we-have they-were we-were what- all what-do what-does with-the with-that would-say would-never how-you. / EXERCISE 7. 88. 1. Rub your sore eye with-your elbow. 2. They-that talk too-much effect nothing. 3. He*t-d a-gossip as-j'ou won Id a -liar. 4. You - will- never sell your fowls on- a rainy day. 5. Do-you-acknowledge that-the sky is hazy in au- tumn? 6. Yes, but it-is-never so in summer. 7. Iha\t'-no memory of any-such tale as-that in-your book. 8. To edit such-a book is-a big job. 9. It-is-in-no-way sufficient for- this purpose. 10. "The-Idiot aud-the Maniac," is-the sub- ject of-my poem. 11. You-may-receive-the essay and-takr- it to-the notary. 12. They eat nothing but milk and-eggs on Sunday. (1113:151:30). 89. SPEED SENTENCE. All-the ships of-the navy will soon sail into-tbe sea and-engage with-the haughty enemy. (4-1.) SUGGESTION. It is well to encourage ihe tendency, which is quite natural, of picturing? in one's mind the characters which represent words heard spoken in conversation, also to cultivate the habit of mentally outlining and phrasing words and sentences. Word and phrase signs must be so thoroughly learned as to be written and read instantly. Spare hours may be given with advantage to writing and reading these abbreviations over and over man^ times. REPORTING STYLE OF SHOUT-HAND. 49 90. TRANSLATE. . 'V ^v ^ P -v / I x'" N I ) \r^ f F v/T I* x / ' ' / . To THE TEACHEK. Vowels trouble most students, mainly because they are not well learned. But they are so few that one can easily become as familiar with them as with the faces of his own brothers and sisters. Vowels are so impor- tant that no good teacher will omit a brief review of them as a part of the regular daily program. Each member should be able when required to give the place, size, form, length, and kind of every one. This review should be partly oral, the long vowels for convenience being named, tee, toy, tah, taiv, toe, too; and the short, it, et, at, ot, ut, oot. The whole class may be called upon to repeat them both forwards and backwards, individually and in concert. Then give all first- place, tee, taw, it, ot, oi, I; next second-place, and last, third- place. The teacher will observe that the more thoroughly a pupil learns a thing, the better will he like it; and, per contra, the better he likes it, the more he will want to learn of it. This is true particularly of anything intrinsically scientific and beautiful, as the vowel scale. LESSON VIII. CONSONANT POSITION. 91. KEY. 1. King me deep leave occupy teach at- tach allowed attack. 2. Nigh away awake ahead July purify ago nuisance. WORD-SIGNS. 8. Common each watch hear her ever give-n dollar thing. 4. Whom home large much thank youth hath had advertise advertising. 5. Anything En- glish-language A. M. P. M. however must-be forthwith to- become single. SENTENCES. 6. Talks on-the subject of electricity will- be given in-the-month of July. 7. It-is-a common-thing to hear her laugh aloud at-your huge fool's-cap. 8. The- Judge said that-the jury should occupy this cool room. 9. They will to-day say what-the damages in-this-case should- be. PHRASES. 10. By-and-by by-the-by by-the-way in-as- much-as she-shall a-year-ago for-a-long-time. 11 Of-the- case as-long-as-it-may many-think-that ought-to-be long- enough shall-never. 92. What is called consonant position is a contrivance made use of to save writing vowels in a certain limited num- ber of common words. With reference to the line of writ- ing, words occupy three different places, known as the first, second, and third consonant positions. Second-position words rest on the line. Most words which have already been in- troduced are of this class. 93. First-position horizontal words are written one space above the line, as king and me. Other first position words are written half a space above the line, as deep, leave occupy, teach. Here, in each case, the first descending letter rests half a space above the line. L 1. 94. Third-position horizontal words are written just be- low the line, as ago and nuisance. Other third-position words are written through the line, the first descending letter resting one-half a space below it, as in awake, ahead, purify. L 2. Plate 8. - I I I I - /v- SENTENCES. \ 10 11 ...X : I PHRASES. TRANSLATE. ) - X ' - r f . ... \ l_o -^ ^ 68 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 95. There are only a few hundred words, all told, that there is any need of writing elsewhere than on the line. These are specified in the lessons which follow, and should be memorized by the pupil. It would be inexpedient at this time to attempt to explain fully the general theory of Con- sonant Position. It is sufficient to state that words which are written in the first position usually contain a. first pltice vowel, and those in the third position, a third place vowel. The learner, however, will distinctly bear in mind that it is by no means true that all words which contain first or third place vowels are for that reason to be put in the first or third positions. 96. The student who consults other text-books, or a ste- nographic dictionary, will find a large number of words marked for the first and third positions. It is nevertheless true, however, that practical reporters generally, no matter what system is followed, or text-book studied, write nearly all the words on the line in actual reporting. The notes thus taken are perfectly legible, although such words as music, academy, month, factory, etc., are written in the second posi- sion rather than in the third. Our aim is to teach the art as it is practiced by the best stenograpliers. This subject is treat- ed at length in Lesson XXXIV. 97. 1 Write in first position: Cause cease song these 2 wise since sight side seek sing office city offset ear 8 weakness sin seen seem abide by she ease easy easily 4 enjoy fall (el) feel (el) joy joyous law leave lie meek 5 avoid mill my occupy thy thee if off pity see talk 6 weak assign right Deity miss size; (ar) fear fire. 7 Third position: Allow at out atom back cap catch 8 aloud allowed view abuse eulogy fool lack laugh 9 loose purity sat suit; (ar) power poor room our hour; 10 thou use due few issue outside await advice. (842:301:30). 98. PHRASES. By-his by-it by-many by-our by-that by- you by-your by-which by-which-many by-which-you for-if REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 53 if-they in-anything many-times my-love shall-give she-says she- was with-each some-may take-the-case think-this whh'h-is which-the-times as-that for-fear for-his-advantage he-has-never I-beg I-feel I-know I-know-nothing I-know- that I-like in-effect in-his by-many in-that-day is-it is-it-a is-it-as is-it-so is-it-you long-way many-have may-also no-knowledge say-so so-be-it so-would was-right all-is. EXERCISE 8. 99. 1. You-may-write-a review of all our many sayings. 2. On-the fourth Sunday of February we-were at-the smok- ing ruins of-that large hotel. 3. We all know-that tire ruins many mills. 4. You-may-write off the-eulogy on-the life, laws anil-power of-the Jewish king. 5. I-will carry that small watch this week and-if-it keeps the-right time I- will give-you $25 for-it. 6. The huge earth moves along its path many miles an hour. (83 2:15 1). 100. SPEED SENTENCE. To-study the-lives and -laws of-the Jewish kings is-a common thing in our day and-age. (4 1) L To THE TEACHER: The following items form an impor- tant and indispensable part of the program of every reci- tation. Each member should be required to bring to the class for the teacher's inspection a carefully prepared copy of the list words, exercise, and speed sentence. It is also well to require a long-hand, or type-written, copy of the Translation. No conscientious teacher will neglect to give at least a little time to the correction of each pupil's work at every recitation. If the class is large it will be necessary to correct such papers out of class hours. The different mem- bers maybe called on miscellaneously to read each a sentence from the translation, also from the exercise, also a number of the list words. This must be done promptly and without hesitation. Hence thorough preparation before-hand in the way of writing and reading the lesson over many times, is 1 absolutely necessary. LESSON IX. 8-CIBCLE JUNCTIONS. 101. KEY. 1. Desk deposit maxim kasteu lesson pen- cil facility vessel. 2. It-is-of-advantage submissive and- his-life atheism exhibit Mexico bask. WORD-SIGNS. 3. Us whose hope happy though whole wholly young to-be. 4. Etc. (et cetera) disadvantage ex- change post-office expect domestic salvation holy own. PHRASES. 5. At-the-time by-such for-the-same-reason it-is-ready it-is-to-be long-since it-is-so. 6. Such-has-never which-is-no who-has-this with-the-same would-receive this- period which-some. 7, 8 and 9. For key see list- words,' sec. 116. SENTENCES. 1. It-is our custom to-sell for cash. 2. Tou-will however be allowed to exchange your map for-a hat or cap or anything-else that-you-may lac-k. 3. The rustic takes counsel with-the judge for half-an-hour but says nothing. 4. For-some purpose he dispatches his son to Cincinnati. 102. The rule laid down in Lesson VI. for joining the cir- cle, applies only when s begins or ends a word. When the circle occurs at the angle formed by the juncture of two Btems, however, it should be written according to the follow- ing directions: 103. When the circle is to be written, 1. At the junction of two straight letters, it should be placed outside the angle, as in desk or deposit. But when the two straight letters are in a direct line forming no angle, s is written on the upper, or right side of the stem, as in Mexico. 2. At the junction of a straight letter and a curve, it should be written within, or following the direction of the curve, as in maxim, hasten. 3. At the junction of two curves, if it cannot follow the direc- tion of both, as in lesson, pencil, vessel, it should almost al- ways be written within the first curve, as in submissive, athe- ism. Sometimes it is more convenient to attach it to the second curve, as in facility. See Ls 1 and 2. -54 Plate 9, x> x V - WOKD-SIGKS. ->- ~ -v _ WORD- FORMS -7 SENTENCES. > 66 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 104. These rules have precisely the same application to all phrases of which s forms a part, as in it-is-of-advantage, and-his-life. L 2. 105. la bask (L 2), it will be observed that the vowel is placed at the angle between \ b and k, which, it would appear, is contrary to the rule laid down in Lesson VII. But if the dot were placed at the end of k, the order of pro- nunciation would necessarily be, b-s-a-k. Evidently the rule in Lesson VII does not apply when a circle occurs be- tween the two stems. In bask, and a few similar words, the vowel must be placed in the angle, that is by the first stem, so that it will be read before s. But the occasion for vowels so situated is rare. 106. Beginners almost without exception write the vow- el word-signs too large. They should be only one-fourth the size of standard letters; e. g. i before, one-fourth of | d, ^ to, one-fourth of \ p, n you one-fourth of / v ra, etc. 107. Placing the circle between two straight letters, write: 1 Custody dispatch discuss dispose exhibit dispel gazet 2 gospel justice succeed capacity Tuesday bestow dis- 8 guise dusk gossip hostile receipt restless upset re- 4 store custom task rustic risk. 6 Between a straight and curved letter: Citizen desire 6 desirous disarm dislike excel Harrison message music 7 resolve instil musical pacific society specify answer 8 dismiss visitor visit reason receive vivacity honesty 9 Massachusetts Minnesota Erastus (ar) Missouri officer 10 sarcasm (ar). Between two curves: Innocence insanity mason scarce- ly Cincinnati refusal (el) license (el) offensive; also write sophomore sorrow genius science sublime Minneapolis. (692:151:15). 108. PHRASES. Any-business at-such at-that at-this at- your he-said it-is-a of-some since-that some-such take- such that-is-never that-is-it this-bill this-day this-reason this-time to-receive to-your was-some which-is-this who- is-the who-is-it. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 57 EXERCISE 9. 109. 1. The-citizeu deposits his salary in-the bank of- Massachusetts with scarcely any risk. 2. The gazette says that Harrison's army will leave Mexico on Saturday of-this week. 3. It- will march all-the-way to Minneapolis, Minne- soto, by-way of Missouri. 4. The-justice informs counsel that-they-may if-they wish discuss the-case before-the-jury for two hours. 5. Do-you-think that-the jury will say that- the youth is insane? 6. Yes, they-have already said-so. 7. He-receives the-message in despair. 8. Many also hear it with sorrow and-dismay. 9. The young sophomore, they say, has-a rare genius for poetry and-music. 10. I-hope the-saying has no sarcasm in-it. 11. I-know, however, that-he excels in science. 12. He never fails to exhibit vi- vacity in society. 13. Instil right maxims into-the souls of our youth. 14. You-will see that-they will-be the happier for-it. (1513:151:30). 110. SPEED SENTENCE. I-hope, however, that-you-will give-the youth whom-you teach the whole story of young Absolom g (4 1). 111. TRANSLATE. > V LESSON X. PHRASEOGRAPHT. 112. RET. 1. I-die I-do I-had give-me pay-him alto- gether I-think-that I-know-you. WORD-SIGNS. 2. Lawyer similar similarity influence Catholic speak speech spoke. 8. Because significant in- significant why Justice-of-the-Peace continue falsehood company. 4. Hence witness testimony mostly may-as- well December thus those. 5. Happiness holiness enlarge postmark mistake if-you-wish Savior. PHRASES. 6. Because-of because-nothing because-we- have cause-and-effect for-as-much public-service. 7. Those- days to-expect continue-it to-whom too-much was-seen what-say-you which-represent. 8. For-as-many who-sup- pose-that as-if as- well-as-usual as-long-as-it-is for-the-same- reason. 9. Have-seen have-to-be that-is-the they-said-so they-speak this-notice this-purpose which-seems. 10 and 11 For key see list words, sec. 117. SENTENCES. 1. Paul, going before-the Justice-of-the- peace, says that Miles carried off some of -his live-stock. 2. The-justice sits and hears the-testimony of-each witness in-the-case. 8. The-lawyer thinks it-would-be of no use to-make-a speech to-the jury. 4. The-testimony shows him to-be the-thief . 5. He-is now in jail. 113. Every stenographer must decennine for himself the precise extent to which he can apply phraseography to ad- vantage. Many do not phrase enough; while possibly some do too much. Students, accustomed in long-hand to disjoin words, invariably find phraseography a hindrance at first; but the practice, once acquired, lessens the labor of report- ing, and also adds to speed and legibility. Three words can be phrased while two of them are being written separately; hence the gain in speed. But words separated by the slight- est rhetorical pause, or mark of punctuation, should not be joined together. This adaptation of phraseography to syntax renders short-hand notes far more legible than they would otherwise be. Plate 10. ' 1 ~. 1 , _ Y-, WORD-SIGNS. \ 1 \ K^ ^ O ^ 10 11 (T ^N V<1 SENTENCES. -J - \ ^_x I 60 REPORTING STYLE OP SHORT-HAND. 114. The first word of a phrase, which for convenience we will call the leader, should be written in its proper position; the words which follow may then be allowed to occupy what- ever position with reference to the line that the phrasi , in due course, may give them. For example, / is the leader in I-think-that, and I-know-you; give, the leader in give-me. In these sentences, that, know, and you, are thrown out of posi- tion, but the writing is none the less legible on this account. The real value and beauty of phrasing, and its philosophy also, will be better understood after the learner has had some experience as a practical short-hand writer. The sub- ject is more fully treated in lesson XLII. 115. By reference to I-die, and I-had (L 1), it will be seen that the first word can sometimes be so written that the second, also, shall occupy its proper position. Generally, however, the reader does not regard the position of words after the first or second, but relies upon the context, which is a sure guide. The necessity imposed on the writer of locating words out of their proper position, occasions no drawback upon legibility. 116. The phrase should be discontinued when an unusual word occurs, or one that must be written in its proper posi- tion in order to be unambiguous. E. g., give-him, and pay- me, should not be joined, for fear of conflict with give-me and pay-him. L 1. 117. 1 Vocalize: Male female dismay parody Caleb; 2 1 pos.: sky cog knock mock nick. Without vowels. 3 1 pos.: oppose rise scheme arise (ar). 3 pos.: amuse 4 accuse pass passage passive sad induce absence south. 6 2 pos.: reach assume form (ar) evade series speed 6 speedy sphere beauty dominate alleviate cavity cool 7 Jewish academy academic factory ensue disobey 8 anxious audacity besiege caustic chastise luxury 9 depository despair (ar) expire (ar) extinguish* gasp 10 Augustus Justus disengage dismal dissolve egotism 11 immensity maximum cohesive solicit vestige veracity 12 decimal clastic exile felicity garrison pacify parasol EEPORT1NG STYLE OF SHORT-IIASrD. 61 13 spasm tenacity velocity Joseph assassin incendiary 14 muscle exterior cancel (el) chancellor (ar) counsel (el) 15 counsellor (ar) damsel domicile fasten gymnasium 16 salary search solitary scarce (ar) malicious select 17 resume besides disease deceit deceive decide design 18 despise decease excite exceed false insight incite 19 inside likewise business mix offence paradox Scotch 1 go sleep sweep epistle alike (el) misery reside resign 21 revise righteous sincere recite rejoice anxiety* excuse 22 animosity casual casualty apostle* subdue tax absorb 23 rescue reduce affair botany deviate dialogue efficacy 24 embody indemnify ingenuity intimacy involve nomi- 25 nate bachelor beneath demagogue dialect dogma "*^6~ enigma epidemic aesthetic gypsy* infect pathetic 27 ramify topic Anthony Timothy Tennessee Louisiana 28 apology obviate eminence apologize assets avarice 29 debase delicious depose diffuse factious fictitious 30 obvious* paradise survive various vex severe (ar) 31 enforce (ar) ethics poetic. (1876-2:30.) 118. PHRASES. Because-of had-the do-you have-seen those-that those-which to-such-a to-suppose was-said which-is-now which-is-the which-shall who-are-you who- come ' be-seen that-day that-is-it that-we that-time they- that they-think-that to-take was-it-so was-it-said was-so which-many which-may which-you will-it-be you-may you-make at-those-times by-as-many by-reason-of in-the- same-way it-is-to-be it-is-long many-such many-things never-said of-as-many of-his-own of-several. EXERCISE 10. 119. 1. Your son is-a wise youth, because he seeks to-do right. 2. In our city we-have much snow in-the-month of December. 8. Joseph Jackson the-lawyer has-a-large in- fluence, and-he-may resign his office. 4. We-think of going into-a business scheme together. 5. Our affairs are now in- such shape that-we may do-so if-we wish. 6. Your absence in Alabama may restore your health, and-thus be-the cause 62 REPORTING 3TYLJ* OF SHORT-HAND. of-rauch happiness. 7. How-long-do-you think you-will re- side in-the South? 8. I- will leave for Dakota in-the-month of May. (9931.) 120. SPEED SENTENCE. As-to-his design in seeking the house of-the justice-of-the-peaee, the-witness spoke a-fal-c- hood in-giving his testimony to-the jury (3 1.) 121. TRANSLATE. SUGGESTION. Most pupils press the pen too hard upon the paper, making both the light and heavy lines heavier than they should be. This extra pressure means, more fric- tion, more labor, more time, less speed. The rapid sten- ographer always touches the paper lightly. It is an excellent plan to cultivate lightness of touch by frequent practice in writing the thin stems as fine as possible, ^executing them rapidly, barely touching the paper with the pen. The learner who also cultivates a compact style of writing, will in the end be both more rapid and accurate. By com- pactness of style is meant that the characters be written not only small, but closely together. The hand-writing of most all beginners is too large and sprawling. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 63 QUESTIONS FOB REVIEW. How many letters in the consonant alphabet? Name them consecutively. Name the light stems; shaded stems. What is the rule for writing words with reference to the base line? What is the proper length for a stem (consonant letter)? (See Sec. 5.) May one outline represent more than one word? (Sec. 9.) How may ambiguity be avoided in such cases? What is the value of shading? (Sec. 10.) Is it strictly necessary in all cases? Is this system orthographic (following the common spelling), or phonetic? (12.) Give examples of the difference between these two methods of writing. What are the equivalents of x, g, and wh? (Note, p. 21.) What is a word-sign? A sign-word? (16.) How are proper names indicated? (18.) Why is el sometimes used instead of lay? (21) Which is the more used, ar or ray? (26.) What are some of the advantages of ray over ar? What is phrasing? (27.) Define a phraseograph; a phraseo- gram. How in phrasing is /expressed? (27.) He? (28.) You? (29.) What is the difference between chay and ray? (31.) How are they distinguished* Give specific cases where ar is to be used; also ray. (32.) What is the number of long vowels? (38.) Give them in order. How many vowel places? (39.) Repeat the rhyme in Sec. 40. Explain the nominal consonant and its use. (41.) How are vowels placed with reference to consonants, in order to be read first? (44.) In phrasing, how are the, and, a and an expressed? (50-51.) Name the diphthongs. (59.) On which side of straight stems is iss written? (62.) Curved stems? (61.) How many short vowels? (78.) Give them in order. State, in your own words, the rule given in Sec. 81. When should s be expressed by the circle, and when by the stem? (85.) How many consonant positions? (92-94.) Describe each. What is the purpose of the scheme of position? How is the circle written when it occurs between two straight stems? A straight stem and a curve? Two curves? (103.) What is the first word of a phrase called? (114.) What are some of the restrictions placed on phrasing? (115-116.) LESSON XI. SEZ-CIRCLE, BMP AND COALESCENTS. 122. KEY. 1. Races chases pauses noises gazes reposes system necessary. 2. Enthusiast success successes suc- cessor exercises subsist Mississippi. 8. Camp ample temple thump sympathize ambitious embark ambiguous. 4. Wet wed muse mule quack wood squeeze Delia 5. Web fuse yam nephew Utah now (or knew) Yankee. 6. Walk wit weep York ague weed cue war. 7. Sweet switch weave wing Quebec liquid Idaho Julia. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 8. Important importance improve improvement may-be simple simply impossible. 9. Temperate temperance square acquit acute senior Junior nevertheless. 10. Failure uniform unite unity Europe quick howsoever idea. 11. Height higher white eye yet ye year beyond. 12. Iowa highway highly United-States is-seen is-said it-is-simply this-is. 13. This- syatera gives-us takes-us loves-us is-such as-soon-as in- this-city. 14. Is-his (or his-is, is-as); as-has (or as-is, as-his, has-his); because-such it-is-something it-is-sufficient this- has-never. 15. For key see list-words, sec. 132. 123. The syllables sis, sys, sez, ces, sus, and other j similar, are denoted- by a circle fonned some five times lai ger than the small one representing s. See races, chases, system, and all words in Ls 1 and 2. 124. The two labials \ p and \ 6, when occurring after > m, are sometimes indicated by shading this curve, as in camp, ample, embark. See L 3. This thickened m is called *-** emp, and has the force of mp or mb. 125. The principles of abbreviation explained in this les- son are also made use of in phraseography. In may-be, for example, ^^ m, the sign for may, is shaded to denote the following \ be. Emp in this case is in reality an abbrevi- ated phraseograph, and is called a phrase-sign. The words "is-said" are expressed by the phrase-sign sezde, which is obtained by enlarging the circle in f said. -64 late II. 1 x? f n O 4 c ./-IN 7. 1 / V U U 12 13 14 15 P O 06 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HANi*. KEY TO PLATE 11 B. 126. Ls 1, 2, I. For key see list words, sec. /!&. Ls 4, 5, 6. For key see phrases, sec. 133. SENTENCES. 7. You-may-write this and-au succeeding exercises with red ink if-you-wish. 8. We would much rather that-you would use simply the-common ink however. 9. A-large lamp was sitting by-the door in-the white temple. 10. That-is what-the Yankee's Irish wife said she saw. 11. Our temperance-speaker 's quick in wit, with-which he unites much irony. 127. The time has now come for us to inquire into the small half-circle word-signs, some of which are w yet, * we, 5 what, > would, and you. How are they obtained? Let us see. First, if to the stem | t we prefix ye, the word yet is the result. Now, instead of using f yay to express the y, the light dot vowel is modified, or rather transformed, into a semi-circle. This little half-circle represents the double sound of ye in the word yet, which maybe written thus, w yet. The pupil will take notice that the semi-circle is similar to the dot in two respects. ^Lrst, it is light, and again, it occupies the second vowel-place. They differ only in form, one being a dot, and the other a semi-circle. The word-sign ^ yet is derived by simply dropping the | t. Then further, the sign ~ beyond is derived by dropping all except the half-circle in ^C beyond. Here, the half-circle ex- presses the double s *~-1 sound yo, and differs in form only from the first-place light dash (which signifies the short sound of o), being like it in respect to vowel-place, and the absence of shading. The two semi-circles, above described, differ in this respect: That the first bows downward, the other upward. All semi-circles in fact which express the union of y with a dot-vowel, bow downwards, while the y dash-vowels bow upwards. W dot-vowels bow to the left, as in wet, wed; and w dash-vowels to the right, as in wood. See L4. - 2 V. O sj 8 > .. / 9 -/~ r 6 * 10 ... U...^.... X^L 'C L SENTENCES. "t ) r TRANSLATE. 1 U ' J ) b S S REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. The Boys and the Horse shoes. A MEMO It Y KELP. C ^ EXPLANATION. The w-coalescents are horizontal, as distinguished from the y-coalescents, which are vertical, as shown by the arms of the first and second boys respectively. The Ws dot to the left, and dash to the right; the Ys dot down- wards, and dash upwards. 129. The learner will distinctly bear in mind that the pre- fixing of w or y to any vowel simply transforms the dot or dash into a semi-circle; and this semi-circle is light or shaded according as the vowel is long or thort, and invariably occu- pies the same vowel position. 180. The coalesce nt signs should be formed as small as possible, and should be complete half-circles, neither angular or flattened out. 131. In the following table the signs have a force equiva- lent to that of the FULL-FACED and italic type in the corre- sponding words. TABLE OF COALESCENTS. W-SERIES. we wa-ve wa-s wa-lk wo-ke woo ttn'-th P wo-t we-t s t0o-rst t-wa-ng ^ woo-\ Y-SERIES. 132. ye yea ya-rn 1 Sez-circle: yaw-n yo-ke you Cases ^ yt-m u ye-t w ya-m paces yo-n you-ug vices fixes census 2 supposes refuses notices decisive desist excess exces- 3 sive exercise exist hypothesis necessity insist emphasis 4 emphasize analysis* (el) Texas Jesus senses surpasses 5 molasses. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 69 6 Using Emp: Pump damp encamp example* lamp 7 lump sample sympathy imbecile* ambiguity* embellish 8 embezzle* empire limp pomp symbol Sampson. 9 Using coalescents: Dke hew cube cubic duel India 10 witch swing wash equip ice ^nf 1 " 1 Irish (shay) 11 irony (ar) item dew widow. 12 (See Vocabulary for outlines.) Acquiesce anguish 13 annual ave:iue barrier exquisite genial ingenious 14 luxurious requisite tedious. (70 2 1.) ^133. PHIIASES. (The first twenty-one of these phrases are engraved in Ls 4, 5, and 6 of Plate B, the order of arrange- ment being different.) That-this-is-the this-never no- njicessity was-necessary this-is-new this-is-never jt-is- un necessary it-is-as is-as-far-as this-is-nothing thafc-it-may- be that-is-now since-this-is-the-case: that-is-necessary many- cases if-necessary in-his-system have-likewise for-example as-soon-as-that as-5t-may as-soon-as-the as-this-is is-neces- sary it-is-such such-cases that-if-necessary that-this-is-now this-is-become this-is-it that-is-never this-is-now they-never. EXERCISE 11. 134. 1. Howsoever much you-may wish to change our money-system, the subject of-importance to discuss this year 1 is-that of temperance. 2. This-is our regular summer uni- form. 3. It-is-to-be seen in-the United-States camps always at-this-time of year. 4. It-is-never to-be seen in Europe however. 5. He loves-us and-he shows his love in-all-that- he does for-us. 6. This city lacks some necessary improve- ments. 7. This-system has already come into use, especial- ly in many of-the large cities. 8. It will soon be in common use in-the United-States. (9821.) 135. SPEED SENTENCE. Temperance is-an important item in-the improvement of-the health of-the United-States army. (5-1.) LESSON XII. DOUBLE CONSONANTS. THE L-HOOK. 136. KEY. 1. Pel bel tel del chel jel kel gel fel vel thl thel shel. 2. Blow bowl glass black settle sickle playful angle bushel. 3. Diploma collegiate total deli- cacy Mitchell Angelica coeval mythological postal. 4. Tell till blew apply able awful full flew call clew. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 5. It-will until at-all com- ply people belong follow angel capable challenge. 6. Each-will which-will children much-will equal difficult difficulty glory glorious deliver. 7. Develop develop- ment humble neglect negligent they-will as-it-will such- will tell-us. 8. Most-likely collect recollect respect re- spectable respectability collect-on-delivery (C. O. D). PHRASES. 9. As-long-as-possible as-much-as-possible in- its-place is-it-likely it-is-difficult peculiar-people till-his- own-time. 10 and 11. For key see list words, sec. 142. SENTENCES. 1. Philosophy will clip an angel's wings. 2. You emphasized the-wrong syllable in class. 8. This will -never do at-all. 4. You-should use this-system as- soon-as you-are able. 5. Much-will-be the-time that-it-will save you. 6. The-reason is that-it-is-a speedy as any, be- sides being far easier. 137. The liquids I and r, by reason of their vowel elements unite intimately, or coalesce, with other consonants which immediately precede them. For example, I unites very nearly with p in play, and with fin Jit/; r unites closely with p in pry and with/ in offer. These double-sounds are of very frequent occurrence in our language, and are usually ex- pressed by a modification, or "hooking," of the stem of the first consonant. 138. To express an added I, straight stems are formed with a small hook at the beginning, placed on the right, or s-circle side. To illustrate, \ called pel, has the force of pi in playful, diploma, etc. This hook is written on the con- cave side of curved stems, thus v__ jl, \ thl. The letters of 70 \ - v r f v xr c c 4 .*_ V r r * ...... * \ WOI!I)-8I(JNS. v-v _..f f .__.__. 1. 1VORD-PORM8. A L 11 SENTENCES. . f DC r >-t < REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. the 1-hook series are named pel, bel, tel, etc. See Ls 1, 2, and 8. These hooked or double letters are vocalized like other consonants, as blow, glass, total, coeval. But the double let- ter is not used if a vowel occurs between the two consonant sounds denoted by it; thus, in bowl, the hook cannot be em- ployed, because the vowel o occurs between b and I. But in blow, in which the sounds of 6 and I blend, the double conso- nant \ bel is used. The hook may and should be employed in all places where no vowel intervenes between any of the double consonants, pel, bel, etc., given in Ll. Sometimes the book is used in cases even where a short vowel comes between, as in tell, till, full, etc. This is common in words of more than one syllable, as delicacy, collegiate, L 3. 139. The s-circle is prefixed to the double consonants of the 1-hook series by being written within tlie hook, as in settle, sickle. In such cases, in order that there may be space for it, 8 is jrmed quite small and somewhat flattened. 140. The adjective ending ful is usually expressed by the doubl consonant./eJ, as in playful. 141 The hooked consonant should be written with one strok^ of the pen. By so doing, not only is speed iacreased, but the liability is lessened of forming the hook too large or too cramped. 142. 1 Write: Assemble assembly available battle 2 blame Jrianaeless blank blush chapel circle claim class 3 eiergy climax close club clumsy clothe declaim double 4 emblem employ enclose English entTEIe fable faculty. 5 festival imply implicit globe legal Illegal (el) inflame 6 level local mingle ..admirable novelty noble oblige ob- 7 stacle parable place pledge poetical radical reflect 8 stable staple table technical initial* tenable dimple 9 unable syllable uncle variable vital vocal ability 10 Florida display disclaim disclose exclaim invisible '71 possible visible academical amicable bashful Bible 12 blemish bliss block blossom cattle chemical classify 18 closet couple likely declivity despicable devil displace ^ V REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 14 dissemble Episcopal fatal flesh fling flour fluency 15 foretell (ar) gable glimpse gloom horrible jingle joy- 16 ful reply label miserable nimble placid plague plank 17 plastic plausible pliable pliant plum plump plus rival 18 shelf * shingle smuggle stubble survival tackle tangle 19 terrible click tumble typical village vehicle wrinkle 20 Clarence HannibalJ^Olara Flora; (using ar) clear clerk 21 declare implore deplore desirable ramble irresistable*; 22 (vocalize) applause bleak clay clue fleece glue clump 23 ply Abel Mabel blue; 1 pos. clock clog gloss clause 24 climb calling evil feeble liable official* please title 25 idle; 3 pos. allowable clash clasp pupil suitable; phil- 26 osophy* philosopher* kill. (17563). 143. PHRASES. All-classes all-places all-respects be- cause-possibly I-call in-any-possible is-it-possible it-is-clear- ly take-place tell-him tell-such tell-them tell-you that- difficulty those-places till-some till-such till-that till-this till-you which-has-possibly which-possibly with-equal-ad- vantage with-equal-effect would-possibly. EXERCISE 12. V / 144. 1. A snake declares war on-an eagle. 2. They en- gage in fearful battle. 3. They display no delicacy. 4. They-make-the air vocal with-the clash of arms. 5. The snake has-the advantage. 6. He-will likely kill the-poor eagle. 7. A-rustic looses the-coil of-the snake. 8. The eagle flies away forthwith. 9. The escape of-the eagle in- flames the snake. 10. His poison flies into-the rustic's milk bottle. 11. The-rustic knows nothing of-the possible evil. 12. He applies the-bottle to-his lips. 13. But-the eagle flying back delivers him. 14. He seizes the-bottle with-his claws aud carries it up mto-the sky. (10321). 145. SPEED SENTENCE. They- will continue to-come until- you tell-him that-it-will most-likely be unnecessary to-collect the class together (4 1). REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 146. TRANSLATE. MNEMON1CAL AIDS. Fig. A. Fitf.B. L-Hook R-Hook L(eft)-Hand R(ight)-Hand L (ess) commonly used R(epeatedly) used. SEMICIRCLES. The very apt little stanza of Mr. Benn Pit- man will greatly aid the pupil in remembering the coal- escents: Floating boats are ye, yay, yah; Capsized, are yaw, yo, you. Waning moons are we, way, wah; And waxing, waw, wo, woo. QUESTIONS FOB, REVIEW. What is the relative size of the sez-circle? What syllables does it represent? Without referring to the book, give five words in which this circle should be used. How may it be employed in phrasing? What is the name applied to the shaded m? What consonant double sounds does it repre- sent? How is it used in phrasing? How many w-coales- cents? Y-coalescents? Repeat all the coalescents in or- der. Name those which bow upwards; downwards; to the right; to the left. What is the form of character which is used to represent coalescents? How do they compare with the vowel signs as to place and shading? Name five sign-words which are represented by semi-circles. Name the 1-hook series. Where is this hook located with reference to straight letters? Curved letters? In what cases must I be expressed by the stem instead of the hook? Name five words from memory in which the 1-hook should be used. Cite cases where this hook is used in phrasing. RrQUIREMENTS. Give three words that contain the sez-circle ; the 1-hook; emp; 1-hook and iss; iss and emp; iss and sez; 1-hook and sez. Render the following skeleton words: Iss-k-sez, iss-b-sez-t, iss-k-emp, m-l-sez, pl-sez, pl-emp, gl-emp- iss, fl-m-z, kl-iss-r, kl-iss-t, kl-emp, iss-m-gl. To THE TEACHER. A familiar knowledge of the word- signs is so desirable that the pupil should be encouraged to learn them as well as the letters of the alphabet itself. Some students commit them to memory in the order in which they are presented in this book. This is far from a waste of time; indeed, all learners would find it time saved in the long run to do likewise. Every teacher who intends using this book to some extent is advised to commit to mind the title of each lesson it contains, and in the order given. 75 LESSON XTTT. B-HOOK SERIES. DIV. 1. 148. KEY. 1. Per ber ter der cher jer ker ger. 2. Pray brow gray destroy disturb exaggerate program crystal. 8. Cross-eyed cypress quaker trouble diagram criticism Nebraska operator. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 4. Appear principal prin- ciple practice practical liberty member remember number brother degree. 5. Truth true doctor dear during dark each-are which-are much-are danger larger. 6. Christian-ity care occur cure accurate inaccurate accuracy dear-sir withdraw. 7. Correct character liberty- of-the-people liberty-of-the-press Member-of-Congress Member-of-the-Legislature practicable proficiency. PHRASES. 8. Any-person I-am-truly in-the-church take- care my-dear Member-of-the-Bar Christian-principles many-persons. 9. All-churches in-person may-bring such- appears take-courage was-truly young-person. 10. For key see list words, sec. 152. SENTENCES. 1. The eye sees what-it brings the-power to see. 2. Truth-and ceremony are two things. 3. Characters never change. 4. Genius is-the faculty of growth. 5. Life is-a comedy to-him who thinks, and-a tragedy to-him who feels. 6. The-truth of -truths is love. 7. The-drama is-the book of-the people. 8. What vigor absence adds to-love. 149. Another initial hook, written on the left of the stem, or side opposite t/ie l-kook, indicates the added r, and is attached to the eight straight letters, and to eight of the curves. The consonants modified by the attachment of this hook are called per, ber, ter, etc. L 1. The r-hook should always be employed where no A r owel occurs between the two sounds expressed by the double consonant, as in pray, brow, gray. L. 2. 150. The r-hook occurs mostly at the beginning of words ; but sometimes it is to be written medially, or in the middle of the word, as in destroy, disturb. Here the circle is located on the 1 ft side of the stem out of its usual position in -76- t A \ V'V }J!atr 13. 1 / X f. WORO-8IUN8. _ ..... \ A .._9.._.5X_ ........... -A A - ( ..._. ( \ _ " 7 ^^f) / 7 6 WORD-FORMS. ,KVi) 7 SENTENCES. ~"1 ( V C ~\T^~A. I \\ ^o V_p V-- MI ru^ ;s c>. "T xffi / c, 78 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. order that the hook may be prefixed to t. Strictly, however, it is not a hook, but an offset, which serves the same purpose. The hook is sometimes expressed also by retracing the pre- ceding consonant, as in program, diagram. Ls 2 and 3. 151. It is easy for the learner to get the 1 and r hooks mixed. Figures A and B will be found useful as memory helps. It will be seen that the 1-hook is obtained by bending the index finger of the L-Hand (L-eft Hand). On the con- trary, the r-hook is produced by bending the first finger of the R-Hand (R-ight Hand). As there are more > than I sounds in our language, so the r-hook occurs more frequently than the 1; and the r-hand, also, is used more than the 1-hand. "^152. 1 Write, using the r-hook and \o\vels : Brace breech 2 bribe broil grow brake praise tribe utter acre brawl 8 caprice crape crawl crew crow dray grape grass 4 growl odor pauper powder prize prose pry slaughter 5 taper trace trail 4oiiiuiuiLjtJtTTr Beatrice Bertha Grace; 6 1 pos.: Greece cry creek Greek. Without vowels: 7 Abbreviate approach appropriate -attoni&y__break baker 8 broke breathe brevity breach bring _courags crazy 9 create creator critic cruel crusade currency deciv;i.-e 10 democracy depress distress drug dress drill drink 11 drop drum drunk educator embrace encourage extra 12 extreme proceed trump gradual gfttsp gravity grocer 13 impress industry* indusliiimu* keeper labor ledger 14 liberal lucre Ludicrous major maker matrimony 15~microscope jnistress neighbor operate paper parallel 16 precious presence press pearl prepare pretty precede} 17 process (sez) progress propose prosper provoke redress 18 reproach soldier treason triumph vapor vigor abridge 19 April arbitrary ardor ascribe barber beggar betray 20 produce brass broker broom brush butcher cathedral 21 charter chemistry cherish copper courageous* courtesy 22 cracker grub crimson criticise* crook crop crucify 23 crumb crush crutch dexterous digress dipper Peter 24 garter gracious grumble Hebrew cream fibre manager* REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 79 25 monogram obtrusive patrol intrigue personate poker 26 trustee trap track trim tropic trunk Ambrose Andrew 27 Edgar Patrick; 1 pos. Agree crime try cross daughter 28 draw dream dry across eager increase preach. (18768.) EXERCISE 13. 153. 1. He that-takes a wife takes care. 2. If-you would create something, you-must-be something. 3. Prayer is-the voice of faith. 4. All things with-which we deal preach to usXo. A-Member-of-the-Bar became a-Member-of-Congress. l He spoke in praise of-the liberty-of-the-press. 7. He said ^~that-it-should publish but-the simple truth. 8. If so, the- liberty-of-the-people would-be in no danger. 9. The-pupil who wishes to-become a-quick writer should practice daily. 10. Dear-sir, I-am now able, and I-will write-you in-these funny characters telling you the-news. (104 2 1.) 154. SPEED SENTENCE. Your brother has-as-much to-do as-a New- York ^aker at Christmas-time. (6 1.) LESSON XIV. K-HOOK SERIES. DIV. 2. 156. KEY. 1. Fer ver thr ther sher zhr mer ner. 2. Phrase favor throttle bother harsher glazier merge machinery. 8. Virginia either Thursday numerous sugar farmer tiger generous. WORD-SIGNS. 4. Every very Mr. mere remark remark- able more mercy humor. 5. There their they-are other from pleasure measure therefore commercial. 6. Hear nor honor honorable manner owner universe universal university. PHRASES. 7. All-their any-more be-sure each-other from-church in-refereuce-to in-respect-to from-some-plarr. 8. From-the-plaee in-the-same-manner in-this-maniH-r many-more more-likely there-is-never there-is-such there- may-be. 9 and 10. For key see list words, sec. 160. SENTENCES. 1. So sad, so fresh, the days that are no- more. 2. You-arrive at-truth through poetry, and-I ar- rive at poetry through truth. 8, Lay a-bridge of silver for- a flying enemy. 4. What-is becoming is honorable, and what-is honorable is becoming. 5. The eyes of-other peo- ple are-the eyes that ruin us. 6. Wise judges are-we of each-other. 157. In writing the word ^ oval, the 1-hook is, accord- ing to rule, written within, or on the concave side, of the curve v. The hook cannot be written conveniently on the opposite, or convex, side of the curve. Then how shall we write over, where r instead of I, is to be expressed ? This is done by merely reversing v. vl, the character ^ vr resulting, over being expressed thus, i. The reversing of fel, vel, thl, etc., brings the hook upon the left or r-hook side of the stems. No conflict is occasioned thereby, since r is not attached to ~^ r ~*\ w, ; s, ) z. LI. 158. To express the added r, "-^ m and ^_^ n are modified ;v > ) *> WOHD-SION9. ^\ WORD-FORMS. V- V V ) .f ; v 83 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. by both prefixing the hook, and thickening the stem; thus ^"^ mr, ^^ nr. No ambiguity results from this shading of the consonants m and n, since no hook is attached to either mp or ng. See merge, machinery, numerous, generous. Ls 2 and 3. 159. In some word-forms containing mr, where it is in- convenient to express the hook it is entirely omitted, thick- ened x-v m, (mp), being employed in lieu of mr, as m farm- er. L 8. 160. Write: 1. Rumor tremor Homer energy* dinner 2 banner exhonorate lunar over tanner Christopher 8 Frauds Frank average* offer camphor Denver over- 4 sight Friday silver leisure pressure treasure censure* 6 exposure inniivuiaaiy diverge livery Luther dishonor* 6 perverse throng verb verge verse Oliver wager Arthur ^J Roger Victor treacherous* favorite pffS^erb prefer 8 gather &luiriff three umbrella repress slipper spider \9 tragedy -teag|c_ traitor problem* profess professor* 10 prolong propriety recur prairie preface premise proni- 11 ium primary prior. Vocalize, throw; 1 pos. auUw+P' 12 authority crisis (sez), decree former fever froe preside 18 prime minor oppressive prereTse (sez) price Christmas; 14 8 pos. address affirm presume scatter -Bsmtw troop 15 through; San Francisco apprehend. (88-2:30 1:30). 161. PHRASES. All -others be-there be-very but-their do-their from-a from-among from-this from-him from- many from-our from-you from-your had-their it- 1 '" their there-have there-was there-will in-a-measure they-are- so through-many ' EXERCISE 14. 162. 1. A-dog crosses a-bridge with-a piece of flesh in-his mouth. 2. He sees his-own shadow in-the crook bel'>w. 8. He takes-it to-be-that of-sonoe^-other dog with-a piece of game double his-o\vn in size. C 4. He therefore drops his piece and-vigorou&ly attacks the-other dog. 5. His desire REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. is to-take the-larger pitce from-him. 6. In-this-way he loses both pieces. 7. He loses that-which he grasps for in- thf-creok, because-it-is-a shadow. 8. He loses his-own be- cause-the-creek washes it away. (94 1 -.45 :45). 1G3. SPEED SENTENCE. I-suppose he-has too-much hon- or t >-be-the author of-such-a rumor in-reference-to Oliver tlif-philosopher. (92). TRANSLATE. \ HINTS TO THE STUDENT. In learning the list-words a good plan is to write the proper characters in a column at the left margin of a sheet of practice paper, afterwards filling out each line by writing the words over and over, gradually in- ;ng the speed. Always carry in your pocket some short-hand book, manu- scri pt or exercise to read at leisure moments, while traveling, waiting for cars or steamboats, for lazy people to keep ap- pointments, or whenever an opportunity for a few minute's study may be had. The sign-book is suitable for this pur- pose. LESSON XV. TRIPLE-CONSONANT SERIES. 165. KEY. 1. S-pr s-br s-tr s-clr s-chr s-jr s-kr s-gr. 2. Spree streak soaker cider suffer sooner discourage subscribe. 8. Secrecy sister prescribe disgrace sacrifice separate disaster supreme. WORD-SIGNS. 4. Express surprise suppress Scripture describe secure such-are such- were external as-it-were. 6. Merciful mortgage neighborhood overwhelm probable probability proper property. 6. New-Hampshire West- Virginia forgive America North-America South-America disappear disagree. 7. Everlasting more-or-less perhaps messenger apprehend apprehensive this-will. V__PHRASES. 8. Very-much was-as-much here-and-there in-the-manner I-assure-you in-each-other how-very there- possibly. 9. Nor-is-this for-some-reason-or-other nothing- more there-are-some there-is-as-much there-is-probably Holy-Scriptures. 10 and 11. For key see list words, sec. 169. SENTENCES. 1. March grass never helps the-farmer. 2. In age we suffer for-the sins of our youth. 8. From say- ing to doing is-a long stretch. 4. The stream comes to-the mill from afar. 5. A smooth stream washes away its banks 6. Give the-devil his due. 166. If to the word pray the s-circle should be prefixed, the word ^f spray would result. If, however, the hook should be omitted, and the circle written in its place, the character V would result. This character is used to* ex- press spr; (it cannot be mistaken for \ sp, since the circles are on opposite sides of the stem.) Hence spray is properly written \ Time is saved and nothing lost by the use of the triple consonant. See L 1. All straight stems of the r-hook series are modified in this same manner to express a preceding s, as in soaker, cider, L 2. 167. But when the circle is to be prefixed to j fr, it 15. 1 \ ^s, 5 8 9 10 11 WORD-FORMS. / / V A \ * WORD-SIGNS. 'N "T -ve ( So ' t- REPORTING STYLE OF SffORT-BAXD. must be written within the hook, as in suffer ; otherwise it would be written ) sr, and have the force of s-r simply, instead of s-fr. The same principle holds true of all curved consonants, vr, thr, shr, etc. See suffer, sooner, L 2. 168. In the outlines for a few such words as discourage and subscribe, where it is inconvenient to write the r-hook, it is entirely omitted, r being readily supplied from the con- text. 69. 1 Write : String spring struck -aetmrg*- scribe 2 -eeber~suffer scrub sltmuiih strap stress eti'cLck sumy- 3 .cjwte-.uupusllrtUut* -supper stray siijuaiiruu^L*; 1 {>. 4 strike scream ; 3 pos. scrap istrnttch. strew. Using 5 both the 1 and r hooks: Agreeable brutal clamor clatter 6 flatter flavor proclaim trsuel triangle trouble verbal 7 calibre chronicle clapper clever clover ri'.ulle- flutter 8 girdle glitter grapple fcudofiurc perplex propel trifle 9 triple tropical scruple treble^struggle. (52 1:30 1.) PHRASES. 170. Which-their in-favor nor-such of-their such-a- manner that-there-are their-reasons there-are-now there- are-persons there-has-never there-is-nothing there-is-now there-is-possibly through-as-many till-their very-drar Y.TV- true which-thcre but-there do-there some-reason-or-otht-r very-many-of-them very-rare till-there all-probability have-probably may-probably some-probability will-perhaps will-probably at-church. EXERCISE 15. 171i 1. Liars should-have quick memories. 2. Two eyes see much; four see more. 3. It is unwise to sing triumph before victory. ' 4. A-fox with-a straw tail is afraid that-it- will catch tire. 5. The shovel makes game of-tlu; poker. 6. To-a person baking a-pie you-may give a-piece of-your cake2> 7. Such-things must-be if-\vc sell ale. 8. Too-many cooks spoil the-broth. (671 : 15 : 30.) REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 87 172. SPEED SENTENCE. There-are-many ways to kill a-dog besides hanging him. (8 1.) TRANSLATE. \k D-SIGNS. \ ^ XL ..... , ... , may signify y. In every case, choice must be made of that sign which forms a good angle with the stem to which it is prefixed. See wage, wedge, wave, yacht, etc. See Ls 5 and 6. These brief signs are chiefly used in cases where "^ w and f y are not convenient, or when their use does not secure angular outlines. 98 94 REPORTING STYLE OF snORT-HA^J). 186. But whenever w occurs before f I, / r,s~^ in, or ^_x n, the first of the two half-circles c is used ; and it is so modified, or adaptc-l, when joined to these letters, as to form an initial hook, as in w!, wr, win, wn. L 1. It is important to clearly understand that this hook, which is derived from the brief w, is itself the w, and after the analogy of the s-cir- cle, is read before the consonant stem to which it is prefixed. This hook differs from the r-hook, or the large w-hook, just explained, for instance, in this respect, that in c acre, r is read after k, whereas in c wine, the hook w is read before n. See wail, swear, swim, etc. Ls 3 and 4. The aspirate tick may be prefixed to the w-hook, as in wharfage, whale. L 4. 187. Using tw, dw, etc., write : 1 QuiU squeal squirm 2 squeak squad squaw squirrel* squash quiz Gaelph 8 qnizical equator* quake quietly squabble squiL quip 4 quiver squall. \V-hook: Wealth wall ware beware 5 worm wolf swoon Edwin worker* won willingly* work 6 worth worthless worthlessly wtrrthlrs-nt'ss worthy well 7 willing window one wear warm acquire weary wool 8 Wales wane wean willow wire. (50 1:15 :45.) PHRASES. 188. Any-one by-one for-one if-we-are it-is-one no-one of-one one-way one-of-these-days nor-which this-one "when-it when-shall when-that when-they while-they worth-notice worth-while as-well-as-possible. EXEUCISE 17. 189. 1. The-laborer is worthy of-his hire. 2. In-lovo we-are all fools alike. 3. He who aspires to nothing, who creates nothing, is unworthy of-living. 4. Love may hope where reason would despair. 5. He-is no fox that hath but- one, hole. 6. When-the wine is-in the wit is out. 7. Stay but-a while, you lose a-mile. 8. There-is but-one Paris. 9. We place, a >IL> nal Hag of red color on-tho railroad near- the tunnel to signify danger. 10. The-teacher offers a-pri/e for-an exercise t hat-is really correct. 11. It-N-a family h of bay color, and-every pupil should try to win it if-possihJe. REPORTING STYLE OP SHORT-HAND. 95 12. There-is-no harm in-having a holiday once-in-a while. 18. But it-would-be well if-the scholar should take-them only rarely. (1362:15: 45.) 190. SPEED SENTENCE. Beware of sitting by-the railway- car window while we-are crossing over the-dangerous bridge. (6-1.) 191. TRANSLATE. ... ' -) r . P....X j ....I.....:, f v. f ...i. To THE TEACHER. Time is valuable, and too much of it must not be spent in waiting on Students who, for any rea- son, have not learned the lesson well enough to read off any portion of it instantly when called upon. The learner who is dull, but earnest, deserves the teacher's indulgence; but the idler must not be allowed to waste time which belongs to the class. LESSON xvm. F-HOOK. 192. KEY. 1. P-f b-f t-f d-f ch-f j-f k-f g-f h-f r f 2. Cough cave puff beef tough deaf chaff Jove huff roughs. 3. Hoofs strives relief dwarf prophesy havoc rove heave provincial. WORD AND PHRASE SIGHTS. 4. Onght-to-have whatever it-would-have out-of which-ought-to-have whichever which-have which-would-have prove approve. 5. Such- ought-to-have such-have such-would-have each-will-have which-will-have much-will-have careful belief believe. 6. Differ different difference try-to-have poverty derive twelve it-will-have set-off set-forth. 7. Which-are-to-have whieh-were-to-have such-are-to-have such-were-to-have govern government said-to-have whoever who-have. 8. Just-had laws-of-life 1 a ws-of- health is-said-to-have ever- lasting-life ever-and-ever forever-and-ever. PHRASES. 9. Must-come must-have so-much I-am-sat- isfied by-wire by-rail telegraphic-messages. 10. To-which- you-refer course-of-business agreeable-to-you how-many- passengers by-express those-who-have we-always. 11. Right-away right-of-way this-property House-of-Repn-- sentatives by-United-States-express Common-carrier dur- ing-the-summer-season . SENTENCES. 1. Poverty and-love are difficult to hide. 2. True love never grows hoary. 3. If Jack is in love he- is no judge of Jill's beauty. 4. He who-would have love must-give love. 5. He that hath no jealousy hath no love. 193. The hooks that have been learned in the past few lessons are termed initial hooks, because they are written at the beginning of letters. Final hooks are those which are placed at the end of stems. The first of these, called the f-hook, is attached to straight consonants only, and lias the force of for v. See cough, cave, puff, etc. L 2. This hook is invariably written on the right-hand, or circle side, of the, stem, and is used only in connection with the ten straight letters shown in L 1. A following s may be expressed by -90 glate 18. WORD-SKINS. / \ L L_|___/ / .../_ L I L 2 ...z- 1 \, 11 SENTENCES.' 9... C C _i C / ./x-v -/ ^. f 98 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAX-D. writing the circle within the hook, as in hoofs, strives. L 3. 194. The fact that either oneof any pair of cognate sounds may be represented by the same sign, with no danger of ambiguity, has been fully shown in the case of the circle, which is sometimes used for ft and sometimes for z, as sen ^ u, *" S ^C^ ^^.-i- J < ^ WOBD-FOP.M9. Ot / CX* XP A o ^O '* \ -^ SENTENCES. ' 102 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 9 cannon sponge ordain origin pagan reckon weapon 10 retain scorn* taken turn obstinate torn vacancy* 11 denote wagon ribbon banish waken barn* beckon 12 tinge bench born bounty canton canvass captain 18 chicken chin county cunning den din disjoin expunge 14 foreign* hurricane laconic maiden mitten panic 15 Austin Dan John enjoin gone attain; 3 pos. June 16 brown town down; (using ar) organ Oregon; (1-hook) 17 chaplain* planet blown glen plunge Blanch; (r-hook) 18 drone branch libertine train drench stricken groan 19 grown trench retrench virgin chronic. (135 3 1:30) PHRASES. 204. As-has-been which-has-been as-well-as-can-be a>- well-as-it-can-be be-done be-so but-can can-be can-do can-have can-it can-it-be can-never bad-been has-been has-done have-been have-done have-taken how-can sudi- a-plan such-as-can such-can such-has-been that-has-been that-plan they-have-been this-has-been till-then to-which- you-can upon-which was-done which-can you-may-then. EXERCISE 19. 205. 1. Pain may-be said to follow pleasure as-its shadow. 2. Peace is rarely denied to-the peaceful. 3. Pity is akin to-love. 4. Pity is love when grown into excess. 5. Prayer is to religion what thinking is to philosophy. 6. To-pray is to-make religion. 7. tie that-has-no cross deserves no crown. 8. The-Bible is-a window in-this prison of hope, through which we look into eternity. 9. Nothing speaks our grief so well as-to speak nothing. 10. Speaking much is-a sign of vanity. 11. The soul knows no persons. 12. He who-is in evil is also in-the punishment of-evil. 13. The- rose is fair, but fairer we it deem, for- that sweet odor which doth in-it live. 14. Keep true to-the dreams of-th^ youth. (128 2 :40.) 206. SPEED SENTENCE. It-has-been spoken again-aml- again by-the chaplain that-the doctrine of-the Christian- religion is-that life is eternal rather-than a-brief span only. (72.) To THE TEACHER. A pleasant recreation, and valuable discipline, are both combined in the following described ex- ercise, designed to cultivate verbal memory. Fens should be laid aside by the class, and dose attention given. One of the exercises in this book may be selected for the purpose. Read off distinctly a short sentence. Call on a member to repeat it. If he fails in the slightest particular, pass to the ntxt. Bear in mind that one of the chief purposes is to impress upon the pupils the importance of precision in reporting. Not only must the pupil return the identical words, but repeat them in the exact order in which they were pronounced by the instructor. Gradually proceed to longer sentences. After a few drills, some pupils will be able to give back sen- tences containing thirty or forty \v >rds. Occasionally read two short sentences, requiring the learner to repeat both, giving the last one first. LESSON N-HOOK, CONTINUED. 208. KEY. 1. V-n th-n z-n zh-n ng-n mp-n w-n y-n. 2. Fawn noun varnish menace fringe iron financial al- manac. 3. Means thence mechanism density dense chance transpire resistance. 4. Punctuate punctuation June than examine fancy intrinsic minstrel. 5. Learn amanuensis tavern silence ransom Kansas credence ven- geance. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 6. Men man human audi- ence providence opinion union heathen within. 7. Heaven organize darkens darkness upon-his opens some-one our- own experience. 8. Obedience responsible more-than at- once every-one cross-examine human-life deliverance. PHRASES. 9. For-instance in-his-situation all-your-own by-his-opinion by-some-means by-means-of have-shown human-being. 10. In-his-opinion in-the-mean-time no- more-than this-instance all-circumstances working-man all-situations. 11 and 12. For key see list words, sec. 218. SENTENCES. 1. Kings' chaff is worth other men's corn. 2. A-man may love his house well though he never rides on- its roof. 8. It-is rare to see a rich man religious. 4. No man's religion ever survives his morals. 209. The n-hook is also attached to curves, as in fawn, noun, varnish, etc., L 2. Since a hook can conveniently be written only within, or following the direction of a curve, but one hook can be attached to this class of letters. This hook is properly chosen to express n, rather than f and v, for the reason that n occurs rruch more frequently than both the other two. 210. When the n-hook is joined to a curve, a following s may be expressed by placing the circle within the hook, as in means, thence, mechanism, L 8. At the end of a word, how- ever, the two consonants ns are expressed, after straight letters, by locating the circle on the n-hook side, as in dense, chance, resistance, L 3. But when ns follows a curve, the cir- -104 $iate 20. V> C J 2 Vi 3 4 V WORD-SIGHS. \ \ d 10 I WOBD-rOBJiS. rv 11 rv s-i I V; J -> \ 12 (T J / -V / / C I c-xfb r __________________ J f V*^'^ J V ^N *j ' J C 1 <-/ ^O 106 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. cle is necessarily written. within the hook, as in ^^ vines; If written otherwise it would express v^, vice instead. 211. Btu this principle does not apply when n is medial, that is, occurring in the middle of a word, even though joined to a straight stem. See mechanism, density, L 3. To illus- trate, the character o is ambiguous, for it may be read either k-skr or kns-k. To avoid this, k-skr is written s and kns-k thus: 3 When, on account of the peculiar formation of an outline, the hook cannot well be written, n is often entirely omitted, as in transpire, L 3. In such cases n is supplied readily from the context. 212. The n-hook is frequently made use of in phrasing to express than, one, and own, as in some-one, our-own, more- than, Ls 7 and 8. 213. 1 Using the n-hook: Lean loan Ethan Julian 2 Adaline Maine main known none coffin campaign* 3 cognomen dominion* earu (ar) finish* infancy ar- 4 range* (ar) Italian lengthen machine maintain* man- 5 age minute saloon Monday monarch* monotonous 6 Roman season* sermon (ar) situation then specimen 7 villian vain anonymous German French London ad- 8 monish amen arraign (ar) battalion brilliancy* cle- 9 mency diminish diminutive domain feminine finance* 10 frown fun infringe launch lone lunch minimum* 11 monopolize monopoly moon muslin ocean omen 12 orphan outline permanence million* phenomenon* 13 Prussian raven refine refrain shun summon sunshine 14 tavern* thin throne tuition* urn (ar) van vanish 15 venom vine violin workman Aaron Allen Alonso 16 Benjamin Franklin* Jonathan Napoleon Nathan Or- 17 lando Solomon Helen Josephine Lillian Susan; 1 p<>s. 18 even evening often line mine mean meaning line 19 shine thine; 3 pos. noon. Fence lance opulence pesti- 20 lence ransom* renounce* patience excellence* thence REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 107 ! 21 violence France silence lonesome specimens cadence f 22 decadence glance guidance occurrence* bronze prince ] 23 residence resistance semblance tense distance pretence j 24 expense trance transitory dense instance dispense { 25 extensive eloquence* disdains detains Lawrence Penn- I 26 sylvania* Wisconsin*; 8 pos. chance dance towns } 27 appliance trac^pose transpire organism transverse 28 transcribe. (16131:30.) PHKASES. 214. All-means and-U;en by-the-means by-which-means do-you-mean for-even have-known in-mine in-vain many- a-man my-opinion one-man some-means some-one-or-other sons-of-men such-a-man than-in-the that-a-man this-even- ing this-opinion what-man what-means working-man which-is-know*i will-thence within-a that-is-necessary. 215. TRANSLATE. 108 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. EXERCISE 20. 216. 1. Men are April when-they woo, December when- they wed. 2. All of-heaven we- have below. 3. Nothing maintains its bloom forever; age succeeds to-age. 4. To err is human, to forgive divine. 5. Many men know how to flatter, few-men know how to-praise. 6. Learn to-lal><>r and-to wait. 7. No man flatters the-woman he-truly loves. 8. Love is-a reality which-is born in-the fairy regions of romance. 9. Shallow men believe in luck; strong men be- lieve in-cause-and-effect. (83 1:15 :25.) 217. SPEED SENTENCE. Every-one who-begins the study of human-life will believe more-than ever before in Provi- dential guidance. ;5 1 . ) LESSON XXT. SHT7N-HOOK. 218. KEY. 1. Caution auction passion option station separation section secretion occupation. 2. Ambition remuneration translation missionary relations associations veneration abbreviation. 3. Diction election portion re- ception obligation fraction suspicion. 4. Dictionary exhibition restriction plantation dejection ction pro- jection. 5. Transgression assertion exception.*! additional prevention discrimination subscription. 6. Injunction sanction function operation oppression temptation pre- sumption. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 7. Confession generation ob- jection expression information revelation revolution sus- pension perfection. 8. Dissatisfaction destruction delib- eration examination cross-examination explanation inclination. 9. Invention reduction reformation repre- sentation signification connection determination. PHRASES. 10. All-directions all-stations by-permission rising-generation there-is-oocasion for-collection J-have-no- 1. I o $Iate 21* % J 3 ~\> J I -3 10 11 12 j - i WORD- FORMS. r SEKTKNCES. V ^J? 1 ' (A ^^ << V > b x OJ V 110 REPORTING STYLE OF SHOXT-HAtfD. objection. 11. Desire-to-say by-special-train answering- your-many-inquiries please-acknowledge wholesale-prices it-is-generally. 12. For key see list words, sec. 222. SENTENCES. 1. Education is-the chief defence of nations. 2. Love is-the piety of-the affections. 8. All-is holy where devotion kneels. 4. We ask advice, but we-mean approba- tion. 5. Truth makes the-face of-that person shine who speaks and-o\vns it. 219. A large final hook, corresponding with the rel-hook in size, is used to denote the frequent endings, tion, sion, don, dan, etc. This hook is written within, or on the con- cave side, of curves, as in ambition, remuneration, transla- tion, L 2. 220. In caution, auction, passion and option (L 1), the shun- hook'is attached to straight stems, and is written on the side opposite the vowel (except in cases where there are two vowels, as in [j addition, when the hook is struck on the circle side). This rule applies when the straight stem is pre- ceded by no letter, hook, or circle. But when such stem is preceded by another consonant sign, it will be found the more convenient to strike the hook on the side opposite what- ever sign may so precede. Referring to L 1, it is seen that the hook in section is on the lower side of k, because the circle is above it, while the reverse is true in secretion. In occupa- tion the hook is at the right of p, k being on the left. See also L 3. By observing this rule the writer may more easily preserve the straightness of the stem. This may be illus- trated by writing section a number of times, placing the hook first above and then below k. In dictionary, L 4, shun may be struck on the upper side of k, so that r may be more easily written. 221. To express these Carious syllables, this hook some- times represents shn, as in mission, and sometimes zhn, as in vision. K, following ng, is often omitted, as in injunction, sanction. L 6. 222. 1 Placing shun on the circle side, write: Omission REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. Ill 2 attention animation dissipation definition* 11 dissension 3 designation desolation devotion discussion elevation 4 evasion expedition intimation rational irrational lim- 5 itation motion locomotion nation notation oration 6 repetition revision selection session submission ammu- 7 nition dictation dimension amputation ascension 8 assassination assimilation coalition decapitation delu- 9 sion division emulation expectation exultation invasion 10 isolation location negotiation* obsei-vwtion pension 11 petition population resolution resurrection solution 12 violation volition mission occasion viwion addition 13 dissolution reputation;. (1-hook) declamation acclama- 14 tion exclamation inflammation; (r-uook) depression 15 emigration impression probation prosecution profession 16 provision aggregation promotion celebration digression 17 exportation extermination nutrition penetration per- 18 petration persecution preservatioa profusion progres- 19 sion suppression supervision termination* creation 20 approbation. 21 Placing S^MW on then-hook side, write: Auction passion 23 exception execution education induction invocation 23 restitution, section crucifixion institution aspiration 24 restoration adoration abduction adoption affection 25 benediction benefaction edification expiration faction 26 infection fiction specification substitution vacation 27 variation visitation diction agitation elocution avoca- 28 tion, (1-hook) exclusion leflection* recollection* classi- 29 fication exploration explosion application; (r-hook) 30 inculcation friction attraction prolongation. (13331:30.) PHRASES. a23. Every-directioa in-the-direction one-instance to- mention would-mention would-occasion because-that-can- be railroad-man by-the-train early-train for-the-mail-train mail -train through-train a-few-days-ago at-your-expense at-the-same-price wholesale-rates I-know-there-has-been 118 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. no-instance in-the-morning in-many-instances that-is-a- question that-it-must-be-done there-has-been would-happen would-instance. EXERCISE 21. 234. 1. Whatever is popular deserves attention. 2. I- know no-manner of speaking so offensive as-that of giving praise and-closing it with-an-exception. 3. The-only-things in-which we-can-be-said to-have any-property are our-actions. 4. We begin life with high expectations. 5. Affectation dis- covers sooner what one is than it-makes-known what one would fain appear to-be. 6. No decking sets forth anything as-much-as affection. 7. We-are-never like angels till our passion dies. 8. Charity is-a wish for-a perfect education. 9. Take away ambition and-vanity and-where will-be your heroes and-patriots? (101 1:30 :40.) 225. SPEED SENTENCE. The-lawyer makes objections to- the cross-examination for-the-reason-that-it-has-no relation to-the examination-in-chief. (4 1.) To THE TEACHER. The short-hand reporter must be able to write many thousands of different words, but nine-tenths of all the writing he does consists in taking down over and over many times only a few hundred very common words. Evidently the first requisite to skill in stenography is a high degree of familiarity with just this class of words and phrases. The reporter writes is, may, will-be, I-can, do-not, hundreds of times to ocean, extracting, calibre, indigo, delve, etc., once. He may take time occasionally to write a hard word in long- hand, but he will fail almost certainly if he is obliged to hes- itate for an instant before writing one of these frequent words or phrases. Hence the Teacher will drill his classes daily, and require the pupil's practice to be devoted mainly to this class of words. To THE TEACHER. A'Phe. "dical differenc-. ; n principle be- tween iiiili^l and firia^'hooks may be illut^ratsd by showing that vowels do not occur'between the two consonants repre- s :'ted by initially hooked stems; whereas a vowel always < and always must occur between every stem and any fin ill hook (,/, or v,) which may be attached to it. A USEFUL READING TEST. Dictate a few sentences back- wards. Phrasing is nc*. to be employed in writing them. Call on the pupil* to read their notes backwards. This will cause the meaning to appear. For occasional practice this is excellent. The dictation should of course be slow. \ LESSON XXTT. 8-SHDN AND IN-HOOKS. 227. KEY. 1. Imposition physician decision precision civilization dispensation transitions cessation. 2. Enslave unsalable inscribe inspiration inseparable insecurity in- solence. 3. Unscrupulous unsociable insomnia uncere- monious insoluble insurrection insatiable. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 4. Unseasonable unscriptural unselfish in-sorae in-as-many in-consideration in-his-usual. 5. In-his-expression in-his-experience in-seeming in-his- description in-his-life in-expressing in-describing. PHRASES. 6. In-any-position in-successiou that-supposi- tion in-some-cases give-possession judges-decision my-own- supposition. 7. All-expenses all-sums-of -money fee-simple notary-public any-thing-else-that can-you-remember knowl- edge-and-belief. 8. Personal-knowledge cause-of-action legal-representative from-your own-knowledge I-will-ask- you for-trial. 9 and 10. For ke> see list words, sec. 230. SENTENCES. 1. Bvery-man at forty is either a-fool or-a- physician. 2. He that knows nothing knows enough if-he knows how to keep his tongue. 8. When a-fool has spoken he-has-done all. 4. The unlucky man breaks his neck upon- a straw. 5. An Englishman's house is-his castle. 6. There- is-never enough where-nothing remains. 228. Any one of the syllables denoted by the shun-hook, when it occurs after an s-circle, may be expressed by con- tinuing the stroke until a small hook is formed on the side opposite, as in imposition, physician, decision, L 1. The learner is cautioned to write, not merely a straight tick, but a well bent hook, or oval, as if about to form another circle. See L 1. The plural is formed by writing the circle within the hook, as in transitions. 229. A small hook-sign, called the in-hook, employed at the beginning of certain words-forms, denotes in, en or un. See enslave, unsalable, L 2. This hook is used instead of ^ ' n when followed by a circle and curve, with which the stem would not join conveniently. The n-hook is also used 114 Pate 22. J rv^ )-SIGNS.\ SENTENCES. s % V- i \j -S v V v \l ^ V- CV \ _ o .\... o 116 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HA.VD. in connection with the triple-consonant series, as in inscribe, inspiration, inseparable, L 2. This hook should be written small, and well curved. 230. 1 Write: Deposition dispositions accession position 2 positions propositions sensation* supposition civiliza- 3 tion exposition procession requisition succession v-x- 4 ation dispensation; 1 pos. opposition acquisition; 3 pos. 5 accusation possession powessions. 6 Also write, using the nr/roer hooks: Curtain drain 7 drove engrave explain cram graphic grave matron 8 patron plain plenty prmnunce* prudence utterance 9 restrain train venerabi* -worn decline economical 10 tribune incline woman* criterion demonstration* fur- 11 niture* paragraph* reference" transgress transmission; 12 1 pos. qualification* women- clean cleave clime green; 13 3 pos. crown drown plan traffic plantation. (62 1:30 :45.) PHRASES. 231. Wouiu-expect you-expect ail-claims at-my-office give-notice original-owner at-what-time can-you-recollect tell-the-jury know-all-men law-journal personal-property take-notice legal-profession how-long-have-you. EXERCISE 22. 232. 1. As-the fool thinks, so the-bell tinks. 2. Custom will make a-man live in-a lion's mouth. 3. Three persons, if-they unite against*a-town, will ruin it. 4. Liberty and- Union, now and-forever, one-and inseparable. 5. Keep a- thing seven years and-then in-some-way it-will-be of use t<>- you. 6. Innocence and-mystery*never dwell long together. 7. It-is-a poor wit that-lives by borrowing the-inventions and-decisions of-others. 8. Never-make business an-excuse to decline the-offices of-humaniry. 9. As we-are born to-work, so others are born to watch over us while wo-.-uv working. 10. Love lessens woman's delicacy and-im-riMs.'-; man's 11. In law nothing is sure bnt-the expense. (121 1 :45 :50.) REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 117 , I 233. SPEED SENTENCE. The-physician says that in-his- experience he-has-had occasion many-times to-prescribe to- men-and-women of all nationalities. (4 1.) 234. TRANSLATE. To THE STUDENT. Do net neglect your orthography English spelling is a horrible atjage, but one which the sten- ographer is obliged to face. Many good writers fail to hold a situation on account of deficiency in this branch. It is only a matter of prudence to saaDrove yourself, if lacking in this respect. Learn to spell to* writing; with the pen, rather than the tongue. Written anm wal spelling are two different things. 118 REPORTING STYLE OF SIIORT-I1AXD. LESSON XXIII. 8T AND STR LOOPS. 235. KEY. 1. List must stump stage disposed justify against gestation. 2. Boaster obstruction distribution stranger illustration spinster strong strength. 8. Gesture manifest enlist stubborn statistics digestion honestly dis- traction. WORD. AND PHRASE SIGNS. 4. First at-first by-the-tirst at-the-first almost next next-time just-what post-pone. 5. Must-like must-make we-must north-west Baptist one of-the-most one-of-the-best. 6. For-the-first-time Ccmstitu- tion-of-the-U.-S. circumstances-of-the-case suggestion sten- ography stenographer stenographic. 7. One-or-two two- or-three three-or-four four-or-five five-or-six six-or-seven seven-or-eight. 8. As-fast-as by-way-ol-illustration from- first-to-last just-been almost-always he-supposed most- important. 9. Ohio mystery extraordinary in-reply-to in-response-to everlasting must-expect. PHRASES. 10. We-love as-well-as-most before-Christ just-now just-as must-necessarily must-also. 11. Must- never to-the-best-advantage one-must such-as-must-be be- supposed must-generally it-is-generally. 12. For key see list words, sec. 238. SENTENCES. 1. The-first blow is half the-battle. 2. When it rains in August it rains honey and wine. 8. The hen which cackles most lays least. 4. Life is real, life is earnest. 5. No fool can keep silence at-a feast. 23i> (S is very often followed by t, forming the consonant double-sound sf, of very frequent occurrence in our language. To express this added t, the s-circle Is elongated, as in lt*t. must, stump. This loop, called ist, is made quite narrow, and extends to the middle of the stem. Zd, which is a cognate ! of at, is also denoted by this loop, as in disposed. Like- in circle, ist may be followed by the s-shun hook, as in gestation; and implies n by being located on the n-hook side cf straight letters, as in against. L 1. $Iate 23. '< <. \> V 3 / Qixf a WORD-8HJNB. v 4 , 'S r- ^-c-^ CT^X Vv X -Vs 3 'V^ ^ SENTENCES. i\. 4 ;-z7\ x i A.vf^! ISO REPORTING STYLK OF SHORT-HAXD. 237. 1st, when written somewhat longer and considerably broader, denotes the added r, as in boaster, obstruction, stranger, L 2. This large loop we call ister. It also may be followed by the s shun hook, as in illustration, and implies n when struck on the left side of the stem, as in spinster. The learner is cautioued to write ister with attention to length rather than breadth, to prevent its being mistaken for sez. To secure facile outlines, the s-circle, instead of the loop, is often used in phrasing, as in must-like, must-make, L 5. 238. 1 Vocalize: Beast boast coast feast ghost host 2 post toast taste steal waste steel; 1 pos. moist steam 8 steep accost. Without vowels: Placed cast chest dust 4 fast guest haste just list arrest (ar) detest disgust * dishonest earnest harvest disposed infest invest in- 6 wstigation* molest must most pretext stage star state 7 stead stole stop stomach store test testify text utmost 8 vast west stump destiny* adjust bequest* twist* best 9 bust digest fist forest inquest* jest nest request robust 10 rust statesman* statute stem stern stiff sting stitch 11 storm stubborn stuff stumble* vest worst. 1 pos. August 12 cost least still stock style honest honestly*; 8 pos. 13 last past stamp attest; (r-hook) breakfast distrust 14 trust intrust breast abreast crest frost grist incrust 13 protest priest; (1-hook) blest; (n-hook) dentist fantastic 16 manifest. 17 Also write: Cluster lustre master monster plaster 18 Sylvester minister* register bluster strange; 8 pos. 19 administer abstraction. (123 31:30.) PHRASES. 239. All-the-rest at-most be-pleased have-just I-am- pleased I-must it-is-just it-is-most must-mean must-receive their-most they-must must-take so-must so-you-must \iry- best what-most which-must-be. EXERCISE 23. 240 . The-presence of-those \vhom wo-lovc is-as ft- REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. double life; absence in-its anxious longing and-sense of ^a- cancy is-as a-foretaste of death. 2. We-that-live to-please must please to-live. 3. It-is-best to-be with-those in-time that- we hope to-be with in eternity. 4. They- that govern must-make least noise. 5. Grace was in-all her steps, heaven in her eye. 6. By gaming we lose both our time and-treas- ure, two things most precious to-the lifeof-man. 7. Genius always gives its-best at-first, prudence at-last. 3. Haste is of-the devil. 9. Though I-am-always in-haste, I-am-never in-a hurry. 10. Men love in-haste, but-they detest at-leisure. 11. Hope is-a lover's staff. 12. That-man lives twice thatr lives the-first life well. 13. The-grave is-a common treasury to-which we-must all be-taken. 14. Choose always the-way that seems the-best, however rough it-may-be. (1652:151:15.) 241. SPEED SENTENCE. One-of-the-best and-most earnest of-the ministers in-the North-west has-just-been advanced to a higher post. (5 1.) THE TYPE-WRITER. Type-writing is much more rapid, and ir. various ways far superior to pen work. A knowledge of this art itself is very valuable, and has become entirely indispensable to the professional Stenographer. The Private Secretary is almost invariably required to make use of a writing machine in preparing transcripts and copies. He is, moreover, expected to be familiar with its operation before he accepts a situation, and skill in manipulating it should, if Eracticable, be gained while the course in Stenography is eing taken. There are a dozen or more different kinds of writing ma- chines. Some of the cheaper instruments do good work, but lack in speed, a requisite entirely indispensable when used in connection with short-hand. The Remington is used most. There are, in fact, so many offices supplied with this excellent type-writer, that it would be policy for every stenographer to learn to operate it, even though he should own or use some other style of machine. If you have no machine to practice on, send for a draught of the key-board and thoroughly learn the location of each letter. TBANBLATB. Mi / C* . I V* I X v^ ^ \ /' r- x \ ex A c "U r i/' \ LESSON XXIV. LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE 843 The writing of a curve double its usual length signifies the addition, first, of thr (see L 1), second, tr (see L 2), ami third, dr (see L 3). The writer's aim should be to write the lengthened curve more than twice its usual length, rather than less, in order to obviate any liability there may be to confound it with standard letters. For convenience long curves are named fetter, vetter, thetter, metier, etc. These in proportion to their length are bent much less than standard stems. To illustrate, metier extends but a trifle further above the line than m, as the figure ^- ^ -^ shows. The occa- sions for lengthening y and zh are very rare. Lengthened / adds tr only; for if the numerous words containing l-thr and l-dr also, were expressed by lengthening I, it would be too much burdened with values. 244. The lengthened mp adds r only, signifying mpr or mbr, as shown in L 4. Lengthened ng adds kr or gr only. See L 5. 245. The three consonant positions are the same for lengthened as for standard length horizonal stems. Down strokes are written in the following manner: 1 pos., on the line; 2 pos., one-half below the line; 3 pos., two-thirds below the line. See whither, water, fatter, L 6. For upstrokes, 1 pos., beginning half a space above the line; 2 pos., begin- ning on the line; 3 pos., beginning half a space below the line. See lighter, later, latter, L 6. 246. A suffix may be expressed by adding a consonant sign to a lengthened letter, as in L 7. When a stem is lengthened, the vowels are always read before the added thr, tr, etc.; but the final hook or circle is not pronounced until afterwards. L 8. For example, in eastern, the final n is not pronounced until after tr; in furtherance, ns is not read until after thr. 247. This principle is utilized to quite an extent in phras- ing. (See Ls 10 to 13.) Lengthening a curve adds there, their, -123- 124 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. or other. Final ng is sometimes lengthened to add there or j their. See L 12. 248. KEY. 1. Father mother weather further farther- more another. 2. Letter reporter material entirely legislator oyster. 3. Order surrender calender murder wander shudder. 4. Timber chamber cumber pamper lumber damper. 5. Conquer anger banker finger hun- ger longer. 6. Whither water fatter lighter later latter. 7. Rendered orderly loitering tenderness waterfall with- ers. 8. Entrance furtherance eastern northern southern lantern obliteration. 9. Flatter stronger whether swifter central diameter immaterial. PHRASES. 10. For-their toave-their may-there from-there in-tbeir some-other. 11. Stronger-than have-their-own some-other-one further-than live-there was-there. 12. Liv- ing-there making-their think-there-is if-there-were in-their- case no-longer-than. 13. At-one-another for-their-satisfac- tion in-their-possession neither-of-them such-matters through-their whether-or-no. SENTENCES. 1. It-is-a well-known saying that murder will out. 2. Hunger makes raw beans sweet. 3. One bar- ber shaves another. 249. 1 Write: Centre eccentric enter hinder hindrance 2 material maternal matter literal render senator tender 8 thunder thermometer wonder yonder entire neither 4 neutral caster eastern thither voter nitre mitre mutter 6 sifter smatter laughter Anderson Alexander re-enter 6 hunter sunder slender winter bewilder smother 7 swifter literary alter chronometer temper slumber 8 limber amber cucumber hamper distemper scamper 9 cumber sombre angry anchor tinker clinker hanker 10 rancor drinker handkerchief. (60 1-20 1.) PHRASES. 250. All-the-matter another-instance anothcr-opinion another-question another-time enter-into for-their-sake for-there-has-been for-there-U for-there-were in-siich-mat- Pate 24* 126 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. ters in-their-opinion in-their-place no-further of-the-matter one-another that-is-another there-is-another to-have-their what-matter what-was-the-matter whenever-there-has-been whenever-there-occurs think-there-has-never think-there- h as-been. EXERCISE 24. . 251. 1. To step aside is human. 2. Music washes away from-the soul the-dust of-every day life. 8. Obstinacy is ever most positive when-it-is-most in-the-wrong. 4. They- who forgive most shall-be-most forgiven. 5. Passion costs me too-much to bestow it upon every trifle. 6. To climb steep hills requires slow pace at-first. 7. Every noble work is-at-first impossible. 8. Time is generally the-best doctor. 9. In-poetry, which-is all fable, truth is still the-perfection. 10. Poetry is truth dwelling in-beauty. 11. Ye stars, that are-the poetry of-heaven. 12. Praise is only praise when well addressed. 13. Solid pudding against empty praise. 14. Live this-day as-if-the last. 15 Who-makes the-fairest show means the-most deceit. 16. Small service is true ser- vice while it-lasts. (1311:451.) 252. SPEED SENTENCE. The-senator calls a-swifter re- porter into another chamber to-fu'ther the-taking of testi- mony in-the murder-trial. (5 1.) NOMEN JLATUKE. It is a matter of considerable importance in teaching, that the more common elements of the system be provided with suitable names. These names, if charac- teristic, will be easily remembered by the learner, and abridge and give precision to the teacher's work. The 1-hook series may be designated, pel, bel, tel, chel, vel, etc., the r-hooks, per, der, jer, ther; n-hooks, pen, ben, fen, shen; f-hooks, pef, tef, jef, hef . Stems doubly hooked, plen, dref, flen, mern, delf, twen, kwef, wern; also, kayshun, beeshun. vcoshun, velshun, pershun, nershun, relshun, etc. REPORTING 8Ttt.lt OF SHORT-HAND. 127 The circles are called iss anJ sez. The loops, ist and ister. Lengthened curves may be signified by adding ter to the letter to be doubled; thus, emter, enter, efter, ithter, wayter, veeter, etc. The teacher will not, however, overlook the fact that when the pupil hears splen, or any other mere name, he does not picture this character in his mind as clearly as when he sees it plainly written on the blackboard. His mental grasp of the system is yet too imperfect. Hence, use names sparingly, and chalk liberally. Blackboard illustrations impress the learner's imagination most forcibly, and he gets a clearer idea of the teacher's meaning, and remembers it longer. 253. TRANSLATE. LESSON XXV. HALVING PRINCIPLE. 254. KEY. . Bit bed cut code gait art quote slate start about act. 2. Bolt giant violet twilight exert merit uncertain suspect. 3. Adjacent debtor inhabit circuit educate precept prerogative nutshell. 4. Captivate legitimate strict reciprocate transmit discredit pre-emi- nent. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. T. Without almighty em- phatic nature natural posterity after afternoon somewhat is-it as-it use-it. 6. Yesterday intellect heart associate sometime intelligence intelligible interchange territory or-not. 7. Heretofore manuscript postscript hesitate for- it better-than in-the-second-place human-nature. PHRASES. 8. After-which at-the-present-time it-is-better- than at-times quite-certa!" though t-we-were almost-certain after-we-have quite-as-well. &U.**. 10. For key see list words, sec. 260. SENTENCES. 1. I-love sometimes to-doubt as-well-as know. 2. Habit is-the deepest law of human-nature. 3. If fame is only to-come after-death I-am in-no hurry for-it. 4. Every- man is-the architect of-his-own fortune. 5. Where no hope is left is felt no fear. 6. Let them obey who know how to rule. 255. One of the most useful contrivances in the entire system is that by which a letter, when shortened to half its usual length, is made to express an added t or d. Thus, \ 6, when shortened in this manner, is read N bt, as in bit, or \ bd, as in bed; k, when halved, has the force of kt, as it cut, or kd, as in code. Tand d are the most frequently recurring consonants, and being cognates, or similar sounds, no ambiguity results from the expression of both by the same contrivance. 256. Learners are cautioned not to write the shortened letters more than half the usual, or standard length, else the two will become confounded. The practice of the writer should be rather to form these brief signs a trifle less than the -IK- Plate 23. V C. 4 TV WORD-SIONS. 6 ( .. "V L \- 10 X H -V r 1 , \ , J vA^XV r V ISO REPOET1NQ STYLB OF SHORT-HAND. standard length. To avoid confusion not only must the halved letters not be too long, but those of standard length also should not be too short. 257. Shortened curves are, in proportion to their length, bent somewhat more than full lengths; as an illustration, it will be seen that ^ mt extends almost as far Above the line as / - m. This practice adds to the angularity of many word-forms. 258. First position words composed entirely of shortened stems, or of a mixture of half-length and horizontal letters, are written one full space above the line, as in bit; third posi- tion words are written almost entirely below the line, as in about, act. 259. In gait, L 1, it will be seen that the added t is pro- nounced after g, but not, however, until the vowel a has been sounded. The rule is, read all vowels before pronounc- ing the t or d expressed by the shortening principle. 260. In the following list t is indicated by halving: 1 Vocalize: Boat boot coat cat vault sect mate dolt 2 nut saint dote; 1 pos. cheat. Without vowels: Date 3 get bet debt hate late net met let fate note vote 4 sent left lift accent enact exact tact adopt better 5 insect accept acceptable insert little result smart 6 limit motive native rabbit recent arithmetic alphabet 7 instigate assent artifice agent intimate repeat promote 8 capital* locomotive certify* certificate* mathematics 9 ratify petrify rusticate support reject auditor (ar) 10 remit (ar) imitate report magnetic resolute resort 11 adjunct agitate cognate cottage dogmatic export ex- 12 tinct inject intact peasant submit musket theft upstart 13 captive certain* circuit* debate decent deject designate 14 desolate eject elect (el) except execute habit habitual 15 eminent emulate erect (ar) estate* innocent irritate 16 legislate originate sentence* abject Hamlet; (1-hook) 17 implicate pleasant vegetable duplicate fluent; 1 pos. 18 client climate; (r-hook) intricate present private pro- REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 131 19 duct promote prospect protract subtract tract trans- 20 late attribute bracelet precinct project restrict thrift 21 tribute decrepit affirmative* aggravate appreciate* 22 October credit deprecate detract extract transcript* 23 approximate. (14532.) PHRASES. 261. After-a after-that after-the at-present be-certain be-thought better-than better-way does-not recent-time has-not have-no-doubt have-sent have-thought I-am-quite- sure I-thought-that is-not no-doubt not-a-man not-enough not-possibly not-much not-that not-every-one present- instance present-time so-little think-there-is-not that-such that-which which-must-not. EXERCISE 25. 262. 1. Always rise from table with-at appetite and-you- will-never sit down without-one. 2. When-we feel a strong desire to thrust our advice upon others, it-is usually because we suspect their weakness; but-we ought rather to suspect oar-own. 3. To-be happy we-must-be true to nature and carry our age along with us. 4. Beauty is-a possession not our-own. 5. The-beautiful are-never desolate, but some-one always loves them. 6. It-is-better for-a young-man to blush than to turn pale. 7. Every Christian is born great, be- cause-he-is born for-heaven. 8. That-which-is-so universal as death must-be-a benefit. 9. We speak of educating our children. Do-we know that our children also educate us? 10. Fortune is-the rod of-the weak and-the staff of-the brave. 11. The-chains of habit are generally too-small to-be felt until-they-are too strong to-be broken. 12. Keep thy heart with all diligence, for out-of-it are- the issues of- life. (1742:151:30.) 263. SPEED SENTENCE. We-will-certainly be-able very soon to-make verbatim-reports of-the eminent speakers in- the debate by-means of-the stenographic art. (4 1.) REPORTING STYLE OF SlIORT-HAXD. TRANSLATE. r ^ r \ CORRESPONDENCE. Letter-writing in short-hand is no more interesting than it is helpful to the learner. You will naturally write more carefully when you expect that your letter will be read by some one at a distance; and this prac- tice will in time give you a habit of accuracy. The perusal of the letters you receive will prove a most valuable drill in reading. You will be compelled to rely entirely upon the short-hand notes; whereas, in reading what you have previ- ously written yourself, you are aided in a measure by mem- ory. It is a mistake to suppose that you must complete your course before undertaking such a correspondence. The better plan is to begin early, writing a mixed hand, that is, all the words stenographically that you are able, and the balance in long-hand. Two points are to be guarded: 1st. Do nqt put words that you have not learned into short- hand. 2nd. Do not fail to employ characters for all words that you have learned. Your instructor will be able to fur- nish you letters of introduction, particularly if you are taught by mail. LESSON XXVI. ADDED D. 265. When t or d is followed by a final vowel, it cannot properly be expressed by the halving principle; for if it were so indicated, it would be impossible so to place the final vowel that it would be read last. To illustrate, t in might may be expressed by shortened m; but the employment of the stem t in mighty indicates the fact of a following vowel. 266. Shortened consonants, when standing alone, are usually employed to denote words that contain but one vowel; for example, half-length d is used for date, while in edit full-length dt must be written. This rule applies also in writing void, avoid, bate, abate, etc. L 1. Increased legibil- ity is thus secured, since the reader is expected to supply but one vowel when a shortened consonant stands alone. 267. The plural of -j-.coat is expressed by affixing the cir- cle s, thus -y coats. This is simple so far as the writer is concerned. But the reader is liable to miscall it coast, sup- posing that the circle s is to be sounded before the added t. The invariable rule, however, is to read t first and s last. If s actually occurs before t, the loop should be employed, as in ^=> coast. 268. Outlines composed entirely of horizontal shortened letters are usually writen in the first position when the accented vowel is first-place, as in void, esteem, swift. The halving principle is used to express the past tense of regular verbs, as obliged, avoided, stopped. PHRASES. 269. Future-time if-it-were-only of-its-own could-have-it this-world's-goods good-time many-facts an-actual-fact ceilain-causes bad-example good-many-times could-not-be- sent would-not-have-been. 184 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 270. KEY. 1. Might mighty date edit void avoid bate abate gate agate. 2. Obliged avoided stopped stood covered comrade infidel betide esteem immature. 3. Evi- dence fortune per-cent swift rhetoric susceptible judicial integrity catalogue. 4. Estimate ultimate evident Con- necticut adjudicate captivate multiply went acquired between. 5. Intentional perpetual apart abstract hermit antagonism Presbyterian prominent return. 6. H at taught sort assimilate athlete dissipate exult ostentatious added. 7. Schedule seldom despite mutual necessitate beautiful delicate district integral. 8. Prejudice transact promulgate federal intolerable acquaintance wayward photograph intention. 9. Advocate defective splendid distinct distribute stimulate instruct invested. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 10. Feature future fact as- tonish astonishment establish establishment onward wis- dom quite history world. 11. If-it it-ought it-would it-had at-it do-it had-it of-it have-it have-had people-of- God. 12. Historian Act-of-Congress at-all-events east- and-west fear-of-God good-and-bad in-the-world all-the- world. PHRASES. 13. As-good-as as-good-as-possible could-never could-not God's-love church-of-God in-which-you-are-en- gaged what-did. 14. Was-received which-is-intended which-made could-nevertheless as-good-as-it if-it-did it-is- admitted that-is-intended. 15. For key see list words, sec. 271. 271. 1 Added d: Bed could good shade stood decided 2 comrade method* instead evidence* educated invade 3 infidel. 4 In the following list both t and d are expressed by 5 halving: 1 pos. east bottom got did light bid God 6 meet invite might indeed fit knot lightning lot soft 7 spot. Vocalize: feat beat naught caught fought dot 8 tight deed shot night slight naught sift ieed knight 9 neat salt sheet spite steed tide; 2 pos. accelerate per- S 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Pate 26. < X -1 .A v T" -^ L b b- <~- I "XL" v i ^L e_ 13 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 10 centage rapid notify dispute active actual* admit 11 cupidity melt dissect dissent expedite extort heredi- 12 tary phonetic stupid fault appetite-, 3 pos. act adapt 13 apt doubt foot footstep bad adult adept absent fat 14 mute; (sez-circle) systematic*; (1-hook) article* doubtful 15 emblematic hospitable notable; (r-hook) Godfrey 16 crabbed crescent proximate lubricate dramatic ener- 17 vate promote integrity; 1 pos. prominent; 8 pos. attract 18 attractive; (rel-hook) relent multiplication; (\\-hook) 19 upward* went warrant quantity* reward acquainted 20 Edward; 1 pos. wind inward awkward wild ward 21 wield; 3 pos. backward outward; (f-hook) indefinite* 22 defective; (n-hook) manipulate pattern tenant candid 23 longitude mandate opponent benefit; (shun-hook) dedi- 24 cation litigation intentional estimation*; (loops) ob- 25 struct investigate* stipulate; (past tense) packed 26 molested trusted manifested transcribed displayed 27 employed adopted dispatched solicited specified 28 searched risked kept; (halving principle applied twice) 29 capitulate recapitulate estimate illegitimate (el) detect 30 mutilate fortunate* protect* deduct latitude rectitude 81 cataract; 1 pos. intent* mitigate; 3 pos. aptitude. (15032.) EXERCISE 26. 272. 1. The-good is always beautiful, the-beautiful is good. 2. Goodness is beauty in-its-best estate. 3. Men often make up in wrath what they want in reason. 4. Let not the-sun go down upon thy. wrath. 5. All things are artificial, for nature is-the-art of-God. 6. Biography is-the home aspect of history. 7. The-desire of knowledge, like thirst of-riches, increases ever with-the acquisition of-it. 8. Life is like wine; he who-would drink it pure must drain it to-the dregs. 9. Literature is-the thought of-thinking souls. 10. Doing good is-the-only certainly happy action of-a man's life. 11. A-life that-is-worth living at-all is worth writing minutely. 12. The universe would-not-be rich REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 137 enough to buy the-vote of-an honest man. 13. Character is-a perfectly educated will. 14. It- were joy to die if-there- be gods, and-sad to-live if-there-be none. 15. It-is-better to desire than to enjoy; to-love than to-be loved. (16821:15.) 273. SPEED SENTENCE. True wisdom is to know what-is- best worth knowing, and to-do what-is-best worth doing. (6-1.) 274. TRANSLAl V. KEY-BOOK. Every student should make a key-book for his own use. For this purpose take a well bound blank book, of a good quality of ruled paper. After your work has been corrected, copy the exercises, list-words, and translations, all in proper order, with an Index showing the page upon which the key for each partic- ular lesson appears. A book of this character, if carefully made, and diligently used for the purpose of reference, will greatly facilitate the progress of its author, and make of him a more accurate reporter. An occasional discrepancy will be discovered between the outlines here taught, and those given in the Pitman Diction- ary. Our rule, however, has been not to depart from this generally accepted standard, only in those few instances where we believed there was good ground for it. LESSON xxvn. SHORTENED DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 275. KEY. 1. Glad brought spread gratitude degen- erate overtake remonstrate discreet secret. 2. Enameled cultivate British secretary overture multiform predomin- ate virtual seclude. 8. Cloud suffered shrewd effort predicate threat sacred verdict vertical. 4. Deplete exclude migrate destroyed graduate demonstrate fertile pervert penetrate. 5. Illustrated cupboard virtuous freedom frustrate scrutiny chartered glide scattered. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 6. Particular opportunity part party creature according according-to virtue child spirit delight guilt guilty. 7. Partake majority minority calculate political prosperity circulate co-operate hundred. 8. In-his-secret as-great-as from-it able-to Great-Britain for-the-most-part in -order-that in -order-to in-regard-to. 9. Till-it tell-it told until-it at-any-rate able-to-give-it with-regard-to at-all-its at-all-times toward towards. PHRASES. 10. Able-to-think be-able-to British-America be-told-that for-my-part Court-of-Justice holy-spirit I-am- able-to with-regard-to-it. SENTENCES. 1. Angels are bright still, though-the bright- est fell. 2. Many delight more in giving of-presents than-in paying debts. 3. A-book may-be as-great-as a-battle. 13, 14 and 15. For key see list words, sec. 277. 276. Letters of the double and triple consonant series are also shortened to denote the addition of t and d, as in glad, brought, spread, enameled, etc. Ls 1 to 5 inclusive. The learner will observe in the examples given that both sounds expressed by the double consonant are pronounced before the added I. 277. 1 Using the 1-hook and vowels: Plate blade plat; 2 1 pos. fleet flight bleed clod; (without vowels) inflate 3 blood glad flood cultivation* include preclude replied 4 tumbled coupled displayed tangled entitled employed 5 smuggled doubled assembled rambled pamphlet; 1 pos. las Plate 27. 1 c_ -7 " WOKD-SU4X6. ^ C _ 9 .1. r r ._ ........ i Pli-itAat,. *" 10 SENTENCES. 13 14 15 WOKU-FORMS. 140 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 6 plead blot plot; (r-hook) vocalize: trait brute prayed 7 crowed cried; 1 pos. creed trite; (without vowels) 8 gathered labored prospered papered uttered shirt 9 tempered altered betrayed muttered offered silvered 10 measured treasured record* clamored flattered traveled 11 troubled fluttered glittered hammered scrupled arbi- 12 trate aristocrat* culprit perpetrate vibrate great re- 13 treat regret grade grateful celebrate democrat credible 14 degrade defraud hatred emigrate third trade hypo- 15 crite gratify bread dread intrude tread spread straight 16 Elbert Frederick Richard Robert Gertrude Albert 17 Alfred. (94-^21:30.) PHRASES. 278. Able-to-agree able-to-do according-to-a all-particu- lars be-called-upon be-told-so be-greatly called-upon for-great great-affairs great-applause great-danger great- deal great-difference great-difficulty great-favor great- many great-men great-nation great-opportunities great- pleasure great-principles great-respect great-truths great- value have-greatly have-told I-am-afraid I-am-told in-a- great-measure in-the-street in-this-world may-greatly to- be-able-tb freedom-(of- the) -press gather-together great-ad- vantage. EXERCISE 27. 279. 1. Tc-do an evil action is base; to-do a good action, without incurring danger, is common enough; but it-is-the part of-a good-man to-do great and-noble deeds, though-he risks everything. 2. Men resemble the-gods in-nothing so- much as-in doing good to-their fellow-creatures. 3. Hcavt'ii from all-creatures hides the-book of fate. 4. A-good heart will at-all-times betray the-best head in-the-world. 5. The- greatest trust between man-and-man is-the-trust of giving counsel. 6. The-next dreadful thing to-a battle lost is-a battle won. 7. It-is seldom the-case that beautiful persons are otherwise of-great virtue. 8. When clouds are seen REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 141 wise-men put on their cloaks. 9. There-can-be no Chris- tianity where there-is-no charity. (134 1:30 1.) 280. SPEED SENTENCE. You-shonld cultivate a-good- memory in-order-that at-all-times you-may-be-able-to-report the-exact evidence which in courts-of -justice is sometimes given at-the rate of two hundred a-minute. (3 1.) 281. TRANSLATE. V "X, ) rv ITEMS OF INTEREST. It has been observed that the pen of the long experienced stenographer follows the speaker al- most automatically. It is indeed true that the reporter can, to a certain extent, take notes while thinking of something else. Stories are told of brilliant young writers taking a nap in the middle of a speech, without losing a single word that fell from the orator's lips. Some stenographers interest them- selves with experiments as to how extensive arithmetical cal- culations can be made while writing one hundred words a minute. Many reports have been taken entirely in the dark; also, by reporters who were obliged to stand, holding their note-books against the wall. LESSON xxvm. HALF-LENGTH FINAL HOOKED STEMS. 282. KEY. 1. Blind lend paved petitioned meant mitten funds drafts bends grand. 2. Rou d around drift dental talent superintendent stimulant suspend counter random. 3. Equivalent strengthened Ireland relevant supplicant frequent insolvent. 4. Landscape dependent craft hint fountain surround silent candor event. 5. Phantom country mankind expedient Atlantic identity suspend announcement. 6. Gentle authentic plunder blend bland frantic ornament. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 7. Prophet profit infinite derivative temperament testament intelligent island gen- tlemen gentleman imagined. 8. Cannot can-it may-nt behind be-nt which-ought-nt which-nt whioh-hd-nt whieh-wd-nt whieh-ought-to-hv-hd which-hv-hd which-wd- hv-hd. 9. It-ought-nt it-nt it-wd-nt it-hd-nt did-nt do- nt had-nt it-ought-to-hv-hd it-wd-hv-hd sueh-ought-to- hv-hd such-hv-hd such-wd-hv-hd. 10. Will-nt which-are-nt which-were-nt dare-nt upon-it on-the-one-hand it- will-not gave-it give-it we-are-nt were-nt. 11. It-will- hv-hd which-will-not have-not such-are-not such-were-nt on-either-hand on-the-other-hand they-are-nt there-would- nt why-nt in-point-of-fact. PHRASES. 12. According-to-agreement at-the-same-mo- ment cunnot-expect did-not-entirely do-not-say human- kind if-it-did-not such-may-not-be. SENTENCES. 1. We-must-al\vays be doing or suffering. 2. The-entire ocean is affected by-a pebble. 3. Beauty lives with kindness. 4. You do-not believe; you on'y believe that-you believe. L 15. For key see list words, see. 284. 283. Stems to which a final hook is joined are also halved, both stem and hook being read before the added t or d, as in blind, lend, paved, petitioned. Meant, for instance, is ex- pressed by the shortened - ^ mn, which is equivalent to mn-t. Here the character mn is regarded as indivisable, and is pro- 142 Pate 28. " ^ \ ^ 1 -a V @N 1 10 lr-3 5 / ^ ~^_? ^ L 144 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. nounced first. In such case it is not allowable to sound t immediately after m, as in met, and before the reading of n expressed by the final hook. Hence, in mitten (L 1), and similar words in which t occurs before the sound indicated by the final hook, the halving principle cannot be applied. 284. 1 Write: 1 pos. gift mind appoint* kind drift; 2 (n-hook) count tent faint fund lent mend paint vent 3 dent tend rent lend bound bend round spend stand 4 repent amend extent fount indent mound refund 5 vacant violent moment accident disappoint disband 6 husband ancient potent infant lament mount moun- 7 tain patent patient payment ardent enchant demand 8 extend tendency* depend movement valient resident 9 serpent servant argument excellent* basement attrn- 10 tive coincident detriment urgent encounter discount 11 impotent delinquent* distant document cogent instant 12 elephant enactment repugnant opulent incident amaze- 13 ment romantic* solvent subsequent* observant abscond 14 memorandum* Maryland Richmond Edmund Omnipo- 15 tent; (using el) elegant element aliment boundless 16 incidental bundle candle; (using ar) indenture sur- 17 mount venture remnant remainder slander* Raymond 18 Roland; 1 pos. bond fond augment joined occupant 19 joint point b.nd find kind appoint diamond; 3 pos. 20 amusement apparent rudiment expand land account 21 pound band cant; (n and 1 hooks) plant blunt applicant 22 supplicant gland plunder* (ar) blunder (ar); (n and r 23 hooks) grand brand front vagrant grand-jury president 24 encouragement frequent* predicament precedent pre- 25 vent reprimand superintend* transparent flagrant 26 profound divergent fragrant pretend fragment brilliant 27 ingredient; 1 pos. grind immigrant print; 3 pos. 28 ground; (n and f hooks) pavement extravagant cove- 29 nant achievement reverend; (n-hook twice) counte- 80 ) ance* tangent penitent liniment monument mendicant 81 abundant*; (initial n-hook) insolent insolvent; (prinji- REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 145 32 pie applied twice) respondent redundant dependent* 33 candidate resentment* sentiment amendment* vindi- 34 cate; 1 pos. treatment appointment* predominant*. (181 4^-3.) PHKASES 28o. According-to-agreement all-mankind by-his-own- statement cannot-be cannot-become cannot-do cannot-go cannot-make cannot-receive cannot-take do-not-doubt do- not-admit do-not-be do-not-know do-not-necessarily for-a- moment had-not-known have-found I-dare-not in-a-mo- ment in-an-instant in-judgment my-mind on-account-of- many on-this-point some-cannot they-will-not this-depart- ment this-did-not this-point tc-the-account-of vei-y-fre- qut'iitjy we-do-not what-cannot to-which-it-may-not this- country depend-upon-it great-extent which-is-believed you-are-determined. EXERCISE 28. 286. 1. Idlers cannot find time to-be idle, or-the indus- trious to-be at-leisure. 2. How slow the-time to-the warm soul that in-the-very instant it forms would-execute a-great design. 3. Nature has inclined us to-love-men. 4. In life we-shall find many men that are great and-some-men that are good, but very few-men that are both great and-good. 5. A-man is sure to dream enough before he dies without- making arrangements for-the-purpose. 6. Good counsels observed are claims to-grace. 7. If-there-is-anything that keeps the-mind open to angel visits, and repels the-ministry of ill, it-is human-love. 8. Age, that-lessens the-enjoyment of-life, increases our desire of-living. 9. We-do-not count a-man's years until he-has-nothing else to-count. 10. There- is-no-such-thing as chance; and what seems to us merest accident springs from-the deepest source of destiny. 11. Do- not-ask if-a-man has-been through college; ask if-a college has-been through him, if-he-is-a walking university. (18221:15.) 146 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 28*. SPEED SENTENCE. The-greatest events of-an age are-its best thoughts. It-is-the nature of-thought to-find its- way into-action. (5 1.) TRANSLATE. * V V P x \ \> A ^ \ \ X T \ ....... . ^ V 'K _../_ u To THE TEACHER. Dictate the following sentence to the class, requiring the pupils afterwards to read it backwards : Receive than give to blessed more is it that believes world the tribe that all and envy hatred jokes practical sarcasm of matter the in. Noel Random. LESSON XXIX. HALF-LENGTH L, R, M, N. 289. f~ L, ~^\ r, - ^ m, ^ ^ n, are thickened when halved to express d, as in read, failed, made, need, L 1. This prac- tice adds to the legibility of short-hand. The characters thus produced, rid, ^ rd, / " s md, ^ nd, will not be mis- taken for shortened f y, ~*^ w, - * mp, and - "ng, for the reason that these four letters are not halved, except in a few specified cases, as attempt, wheat, longed, L 2. The down- ward I is always used when shaded to express d, as in failed. These letters, however, are not shaded to indicate d when either the w or n hook is attached, as in wild, arraigned, mind, wend. Also, I is struck upwards after ms, and hence cannot be shaded to express d, as in ^- tf mislaid. 290. A final half-length j t, denoting tiite, tude, or ted, is disjoined in some cases in order to render it distinguishable, as in institute, treated, multitude, L 1. When reading half-length stems, not only the s-circle, but the st-loop, is pronounced after t or d has been sounded, as in midst, didst, greatest, L 3. 291. When one or several hooks, circles and vowels are appended to a shortened stem, the order of pronunciation is a source of some little embarrassment to most beginners. Just where or when to sound the t is the question. To further clear away this difficulty, let us analyze the outline restraints. Directing our attention to the second syllable, we find in addition to a, six consonants all expressed by one movement of the pen. The consonants of this syllable, s-t-r-n-t-s, are expressed in this manner: s-t-r by the triple consonant | str, n by the final hook (implied), t by the shortening principle, s by the circle. Hei'e, t, as in all such cases, is sounded before, immediately before, the final s-circle. It may seem a little extraordinary that t (which is 147 148 BEPOBT1NO STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. expressed by halving) should occur between nand s, although these two sounds, ns, are both indicated by a single sign, namely, the s-circle, strucK on the left side of the stem. This may appear complicated, but it is not really so; the observant learner will not be embarrassed by it. Bear distinctly in mind that the final circle is always read last, and that t is sounded just before it. When no final circle occurs, then t is pronounced last, that is, after the stem and all appended hooks, circles and vowels have been sounded. 292. KEY. 1. Institute treated multitude read failed made need laid yield. 2. Wild around mind wend attempt wheat longed herald standard coward defend . 8. Midst didst greatest Indiana afford ordinance re- demption modern index undoubtedly prompt. WORD AND PHRASE SIGNS. 4. Immediately under hand hold held lord word heard hard individual. 5. Down- ward forward undergo afterward behold short-hand hand-in-hand before-hand great-extent Word-of-God. 6. Hazard hand-writing landlord understand greater-than ladies-and-gentlemen advancement hardware handsome. PHRASES. 7. May-not-be Mr. -President words-of-my- text words-of-our-text this-will-not been-understood for- the-Word-of-God what-in-the-world. 8. Need-not through- the-world under-such world-of-nature world-to-come of- whieh-it-may-not-be you-will-not if-it-do-not. 9 and 10. For key see list words, sec. 294. SENTENCES.. 1. The-path of glory leads but to-the grave. 2. He-makes no friend who-never had-a foe. 8. Every-man desires to-live long, but no man would-be old. 4. By steps we-may ascend to God. 5. They say women and-mnsic should-never be dated. 6. Where there-is-no hope tln-n-- can-be no endeavor. 7. Few people know how to-be old. 293. It is often inexpedient to use a half-length letter when the angle formed by its juncture with another consonant is not sufficient to render it read : 'y distinguishable; e. g., in ( looked, the shortened k shoulu _:>t be used, since the u u WOBD-BIONS. r r > 8 -------------- 9 WORD-FORMS. I/ 9 U, jC_J_V | \ 10 r b V SEKTENCE8. \> ( * V^+i ^j s~+, -\ -^^ ^ \ \ 150 EEPOBTINO STYLE OF SlfORT-IIAXD. combination l-kt, when written quickly, would have the ap- pearance of lengthened 1. For similar reasons the halved sh should not be used after I; n, f, or v after t or d; t after t or d, or k after /or v. 294. 1 Using Id, write : Load scold lead fold manifold 2 mould Springfield uniold old led sold crawled drilled; 3 1 pos. lead leader mild field; 3 pos. loud lad mood; 4 (rd) absurd deplored beard yard Leonard sword; 5 1 pos. kindred read (verb) redeem; (md) mud modify 6 meditate* blamed inflamed claimed blossomed drummed 7 toiled meddle; 1 pos. medium* modulation mid mid- 8 night middle midst model moderate; 3 pos. mad; 9 (nd) defend end endless* send defendant* ascend 10 ascendant descend descendant endeavor* indolence* 11 indolent indigent indivisible indulge* reasoned inde- 12 pendent* errand transcend; 1 pos. need needless (el) 13 needle (el) Indian indicate* indication intend; 3 pos. 14 sanr 1 .; (disjoined ted) dated destitute dreaded; 3 pos. 15 attitude. (791:451.) PHRASES. 295. Have-believed in-the-country in-the-land my-good- friend some-account they-did-not we-had-not be-made do-not-understand have-understood I-am-informed I-un- derstood my-own-understanding should-understand this- understanding under-which under-this which-is-understood under-the-present-circumstances absolutely-indispensable do-not-have-time world-(of)-fashion world-(of)-spirits. EXERCISE 29. 296. 1. Adversity is-the trial of-principle. 2. Whhout- it a-man hardly knows whether he-is-honest or-not. 8. Act well at-the moment and-you-have performed a-good action to all-eternity. 4. For-my-own part I-had-rather be old only a-short-time than-be old before I really am so. 5. A- merry heart doeth good like-a medicine, but-a broken spirit drieth the-bones. 6. Heaven's eternal wisdom has decreed BEPOBTINO STYLE OP SHORT-RAND. 161 that man of man should ever stand in-need. 7. Hatred is always honest, rarely, if -ever, assumed. 8. So-much can- not-be-said for-love. 9. O, how-much more doth beauty beauteous seem by-that sweet ornament which-truth doth give. 10. There's-a divinity that shapes our ends, rough hew them how we- will. 11. Genius makes-its observations in short-hand; talent writes-them out at-length. (1411:301.) 297. SPEED SENTENCE. The-great man is-he who in-the- midst of-the crowd keeps with perfect sweetness the-inde- pendence of solitude. (5 1.) 298. TRANSLATE. O V ( x LESSON XXX. INTEKVOCALIZATION. 299. KEY. 1. Cheer Abigail Margrave gill fill Palgrave chart chill. 2. Cork gold ruliug tolerable purchase arraful sport accord. 8. Child signature require foil fowl lecture qualify picture. 4. Core gall shoal epicure prevail jealous school corporal. 6. Persevere correspon- dent preliminary fur gal carve nurse encore. 6. En- gineer pilgrim utility volume balcony partial Delaware guilt. 7. Miracle skill delicate derange falter Virginia secure security. 8. Legislature derogatory mortal ordin- ary voluntary moral insurance Baltimore. 9 to 13 inclu- sive. For key see list words, sec. 303. SENTENCES. 1. In a-better world we- will-find our young years and-our old friends. 2. The child is lather of-the man. 8. Admiration is-the daughter of ignorance. 800. Any letter of the double or triple consonant series may be intervocalized, by which is meant the vowel may be placed in such a manner as to be read between the two con- sonants. E. g., c & r with the dash vowel I o struck through it, is read <~H- core. Here the vowel is read after k and before r. Second and third place vowels are struck through the stem, but first-place dashes are written just before, as in gall, L 4. When a dot vowel is to be written, a small circle is used instead, and placed before the stem if long, as in cheer, Abigail, Margrave; and after it if short, as in gill, L 1. 301. This principle is not of frequent application; it is, however, essential thoroughly to learn the signs here ex- plained. One advantage secured by the principle of inter- vocalization is the use of briefer outlines than would other- wise be admissible. Since it is the rule not to form any outline too brief for vocalization, the sounds expressed by the double consonant stems, pr, tr, pi, tl, etc., would have to be written with the long ~^\ r or f~ I in many cases where the hooks may now be used instead. In moral (L 8), for ex- ample, the outline mr-l is proper, since it will admit of vocal- 168 i 7 X 7 o WOBD-rOHMS. 9 10 J. SENTENCES. 30* - <. V s / c M / I / \ .TV... r <^ \. 154 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAyD. izalion; otherwise the r-hook could not be employed. 302. The double-length curves may be intervocalized by striking the vowel-sign through the stem, as in^v^ -^ entire. 803. 1 Intervocalize: Cur cull gull fort board port 2 chart dirt purse spur terse course college impulse 8 infer infirm invalid curb North* morality shirk pursue 4 corner ridicule darling sharp thirst till term agricul- 6 ture* capture cargo culture decorum calico distil 6 parlor* porter portray purple turkey valid George. 7 Without vowels: elaborate* enormity demoralize* jour- 8 ney nerve nervous nourish perceive perjure person 9 endorse pursued recall regulate* telegram* Thursday 10 vulgar corporate incorporate director divulge farthing 11 marble marshal* nursery nurture obscure parcel 12 shark singular* torpedo valedictory vinegar volcano 13 Charles; (sez) persist paralysis parenthesis; (f-hook) 14 gulf turf telegraph imperative narrative; (n-hook) bur- 15 den margin pardon pertain diligence jurisprudence 16 terminate German bargain cosmopolitan galvanic 17 Mormon northeastern* Morgan; (shun-hook) perception 18 circulation* partition jurisdiction corruption regula- 19 tion*; (rel-hook) journal* normal personal* phrenology; 20 (halving) carpenter garment departure (ar) invert 21 market merchant merchandise mercantile (el) particle 22 partner regard record transport Vermont Pittsburg 23 deliberate* correspond* correspondence default forbid 24 parliament persecute portrait purport recorder scarlet 25 told velvet Arnold. (1392:451:30.) PHEA8ES. 304. In-course-of it-is-calculated political-agitation po- litical-power so-sure that-is-where towards-it towards-such towards-another towards-that towards-the towards-this very-short very-sure which-surely as-it-certainly as-little- as-possible between-the between -which by-which-it-seems by-which-it-\vas East-Indies for-the-present very-certain future-time if-it-be if-it-does if-it-is-not if-it-is-possible if- EEPOETINO STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 155 it-were in-fact it-is-better-than it-is-no-doubt seems-to-me more-certain must-not no-better-than not-absolutely not- generally ought-to-be. EXERCISE 30. 305. 1. Action is eloquence, and- the eyes of-the ignorant more learned than their ears. 2. It-is often better to-have a-great-deal of harm happen to-one than-a-little; a-great-deal may arouse you to remove what-a-little will only accustom - you to endure. 3. There-is-nothing that-makes-its-way more-directly to-the soul than beauty. 4. We-make way for-the-man who boldly pushes past us. 5. Your-little child is-your only true democrat. 6. Childhood shows the-man as-the morning shows the-day. 7. Defeat is-a school in- which truth always grows strong. (101 1:10 :45.) 306. SPEED SENTENCE. Rich-men without wisdom and learning are called sheep with golden fleeces. (9 1.) 307. i BUSINESS LETTERS. (To be phrased by the student.) CINCINNATI, March 18, 1886. MESSRS. W. FROTHINGHAM & Co., Louisville, Ky. Dear Sirs: We shall offer to-morrow, March 19, at 4i net, by case only, our entire stock of Dunnell fancy prints, embracing all the seersuckers, satines, and special styles. We shall be pleased to have your house represented. Very truly yours, DONALDSON, BOGARDTJS & Co. 308. NEWARK, N. J., June 22, 1886. E. D. GlLDERSLEEVE, ESQ. Dear Sir: Orders received and shall have prompt atten- tion. We did not expect to stop at all, but owing to removal will have to suspend about one week after July 4th. Any orders up to that time we can fill as usual. Owing to in- creased trade, and not having room enough, we have built a factory which we will occupy about July 10th. Yours very truly, MCNEIL, ANDERSON & Co. 156 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. \ THE ' ' FIVE RULES " OF THE AMERICAN SPELLING REFORM ASSOCIATION: 1. Use f for ph sounded as f, as in alfabet, fantom, filosofy, telegrqf, etc. 2. Use t for d or ed final sounded as t, as in stop, puft, lockt, crost, pusht, pilcht, fixt, etc. 8. Drop a from digraf ea sounded as short e, as in breth, hed, helth, sted, etc. 4. Drop silent e final in a short syllabi, as in hav, giv, liv, forbad, hoslil, infinit, activ, etc. 5. When a word ends with a dubl letter, omit the last, as in eb, ad, stqf, eg, shal, toil, tel, etc. THE "TEN WORDS: hav, giv, liv, gard, ar. Tho, thru, wisht, catalog, definit, LESSON PREFIXES. 310. The commonest prefixes and affixes are provided with brief signs, the greater number of which are joined to the main outline. List of prefixes: Con com cog counter contra contri con- tro circum self inter intro anti magna magni super mat post. Con, com and cog are indicated by a dot, as in compress, conduce, cognition. LI. In most cases, however, this dot is entirely omitted with no loss of legibility. In such cases the safest practice is to refrain from ^hrasing with preceding words. To illustrate, (^> they-complain should not be phrased, whereas k they-plan should be. The fact that complain is not joined to they is indicative of the prefix con, and the dot sign need not be written. Con, com, cog, when medial are expressed by separating the preceding from the following portion of the word, as in accommodation, accompany, etc., L 4. Counter, contra-i-o, are indicated by a slant' ng tick, as in countermarch, contradiction, contribution, L 1. Circum, self, are denoted by the s-circle, as in self-con- sciousness, circumvent, L 2. Inter, intro, anti, ante, are denoted by the shortened n, joined to the remaining part of the word, as in interview, in- troduce, antiseptic, L 2. Magni, magna, may be indicated by the disjoined m, as in magnify, L 2. Mai, post, super, are commonly expressed by the characters, C^ nil, \3 ps, ^\ spr, as in malcontent, postman, supervene, L2. Prefix-signs should always be written previously to forming the remaining portion of the word. Speed is interfered with 157 1 58 R EPOR 77.VC STYLE OF SHOR T II A XD. when the reporter must go back and place these marks after the body of the word has been written. 311. KEY. 1. Compress conduce cognition accommo- date recommend countermarch contradiction contribution. 2. Interview introduce antiseptic self-consciousness cir- cumvent magnify mal-content postman supervene. 3. Commit commodity contemporary conquest communi- ty commentary confess compensate. 4. Accommodation accompany reconstruct recognition excommunicate in- comprehensible conjunction inconsistent. 5. Counter- balance counterpart interpose interrogation internal in- terrupt antiquary discontent interest. 6. Commission compensation contempt command confidence composition constitute commencement conductor. 7 to 10 inclusive. For key see list words, sec. 312. WORD-SIGNS. 11. Circumstantial malpractice construc- tion constructive incompetent consequence consequent consequential. 12. Unconcern comprehend comprehensive antiquity antiquarian consider consideration reconsider confidential. PHRASES. 13. For-a-consideration I-am-content in-his- opinion in-his-own-interest it-is-interesting under-any-cir- cumstances every-circumstance that-conclusion. SENTENCES. 1. Active natures are rarely melancholy. 2. Our actions are our-own, their consequences belong to Heaven. 3. Love is incompatible with fear. 312. In the following list, the prefixes, printed in italics, are to be represented by the signs just explained. The sylla- bles enclosed in brackets may also be written, but as these are common words, the prefix signs are usually omitted altogether. 1 Cow-pass cow-pose (con)vict (con)tinual (el) (con)- 2 temporary (emp) tnter-pose con-sole twter-fere* circum- 8 navigate con-ceit cora-ciliate cow-demn de-com-pose dis- 4 oom-pose dis(con)tinue inter-na\* re-cog-nize re-fiw-cile 5 self-nsh* un(con)scious anli'-thesis comm-ittee cow-pile Plate 31* \> J 6 \ ^ ~\ ' 6 ^~3 V U WORD-FORJIS. 7 X 10 w 11 is } \ f L/ k j 13 v-A-^oP SENTENCES. i 160 REPORTING STYLE 0V SHORT-HAND. 6 con-cede mis-cow-ceive (eom)pare cownter-check post- 7 paid con-spire (con)veyance con-voke (com)panson 8 con-ceive (con) form (con)scientious* (con)scious (con)- 9 sist; 1 pos. con-sign con-ceal counter-sign; 3 pos. con- 10 duce (con)sume tracer-view; (1-hook) con-stable in-com- 11 parable in-con-ceivable (accom)plish* (com)pel (con)- 12 flict* tnter-val; (r-hook) con-cur con-fer etrcwrn-ference 13 in-cow-prehensible pre-con-ceive self-control (con) firm 14 (con)gress (con)trary (con)verse enter-prise*; 3 pos. 15 (con)strue mis con-strue; (f-hook) (con)servative (cun)- 16 trive (con)trivance; (n-hook) (con)tain (con)tains con- 17 fine cottnter-balance* conra-vene in(con)venience re- 18 eom-pense (com)panion . (com)plain (con)cern* (con)- 19 science (con)stancy (con)strain (con)venience* (con)vince 20 enter-tain inter- vene; 1 pos. counter-mine; (shun-hook) 21 (com)mission (com)petition (con)fession counter-action 22 re-comm-endation* anii-cipation (com)plexion (con)ces- 23 sion (con)clusion (con)demnation (con)solklation (con)- 24 viction (con)templation (emp) tnter-pretation (com)bina- 25 tion (con)dition (con)ception conirt-bution eon-version 26 inter-jection (con)gregation ; 1 pos. (com)pletion; 3 pos. 27 con-fusion (com)passion; (s-shun-hook) (com)position; 28 (st-loop) con-test con-trast corn-posed con-gestion* con- 29 text (con)stitution*; (halving) ctrc?/m-spect corn-bat 80 (con)template (emp) (com)ment (eon)duct (con)sent 31 con-cert (con)descend (con)sult tnter-dict dis(con)nect* 32 com-patible tncom-plete* tnter-sect mis(con)duct 33 recornni-end* self-esteem* anft-cipate a-^ ng cannot conveniently be joined, as in preserving, castings, doing-the, L 1. The s and sez circles denote self and selves, as in himself, ourselves. Ship is expressed by sh, as in friendship. But in order to avoid unsuitable outlines, sh is sometimes disjoined, as in lordship, courtship. The endings, ility, ality, arity, are signified by the detach- ment of any letter from the preceding part of the word, as in barbarity, fidelity, instrumentality, L 2. The terminations, ble, bly, ful, are often indicated by b and./" simply, as in admissible, disgraceful, Ls 3 and 4. Mnt, when written separately from the preceding part of the word, indicates mental, as well as mentality, as in instru- mental, L 2. Hood is denoted by d, usually joined, as in womanhood. The ending, soever, is written sv, as in whensoever, L 4. Ture is expressed by tr, as in structure, L 1. When rendered desirable by convenience or angularity, final I is disjoined to express ly, as in vastly, beastly, L 3. The prefix and affix signs cannot of course be employed when the syllables they represent are independent words, as ship, con, self, counter, etc. 318. 1 Write: Debil-ity vit-ality stab-ility* instrument- 2 (ility legib-tVtty reliab-tVtYy famili-artYy c&st-ing observ- 3 in-j huxt-ings disgrace-/ui sensi-6e advisa-6/e your-se{/* 4 it-self priest-food who-soever* host-ility; 1 pos. my-self* 5 thy-self divisi-ble; 8 pos. our-selves* admissi-We town- 6 ship; (halving) hospit-ality individu-/tYy* hard-sAtp 7 lord-ship court-ship partner-sAtp accounta-ftfe admitt-tngr 163 Ift4 RBPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 8 bleed-tngr trea.t-ing putt-ing plead-tnys debat-tngr dread- 9 ing fundamental* orn&-mental* supple-mental regi- 10 mental detri-mental ele-mental horseman-ship scholar- 11 ship workman-stop fellow-stop where-soeuer* which- 12 soever whom-soever. (49 1 :SO.) 319. KEY. 1. Preserving castings doing-the himself ourselves accountable lordship friendship graceful struc- ture. 2. Fidelity individuality barbarity credulity hos- pitality formality instrumental legibility. 8. Vastly beastly regularity illegibility intellectuality womanhood disgraceful township courtship. 4. Whensoever ostensi- ble citizenship engravings fixture manhood childhood admissible yourselves. PHRASES. 5. Political-principles short-space-of-time as- little-as by-which-it-may-be by-which-it-would-be for-some- time if -it-is it-is-absolutely-necessary. 6. Let-us-be most- natural must-not-be present-question such-is-not-the-case this-is-not-the-case thought-we-were to-state. SENTENCES. 1. No sensible-person ever made-an apology. 2. To-love-one that-is great is almost to-be great one's-self . 3. No man was ever so-much deceived by another *s by himself. 4. Self-trust is-the essence of heroism. PHKASES. 320. Take-some-time that-does-not that-thought there- certainly there-is-absolutely there-is-no-doubt there-might they-are-certain-that they-are-sometimes they-thought this- has-not this-is-intended this-is-no-doubt this-is-not this-no- doubt thought-this to-certain to-prevent to-which-it-can to-which-it-is to-which-it-may very-certain was-no-doubt we-thought what-might which-is-no-doubt which-must-not who-had-not without-doubt without-his-knowledge without- it without-such without-thai without-their without-them without-this. EXERCISE 32. 821. 1. The- more a-man denies himself the-more he-shall Pau 32. i V'-=. i -T, 72, ^ . ^| ^\/\ "I 3 V V ^' ^ m, as in Rome. L 1. 2. When either of these letters is preceded by an initial vowel, use the downward stroke, as in alkali, alike, elect, early, ark. L 1. Exception. When either is immediately followed by a downward letter, use lay or ray, even though it is preceded by an initial vowel, as in alight, elbow, arch, arrive. L 2 3. When r is the last consonant, but followed by a vowel, use ray, as in cherry, faro. When r is the last consonant, and not followed by a vowel, use ar, as in chair, fair. L 2. Exceptions, (a) Final r, however, should be struck up- ward, even though not followed by a vowel, in cases where Slate 33. vr 6 170 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. the use of ar would carry the word two spaces below the line, as in pompadour. (b) At the end of words always use lay after c kr and a skr, as in curl, scroll. (c) At the end of words use ar after Q sk, c kl, ski, and c kw, as in score, declare, choir. (d) Ray is always used after ^-^ m, S hay and / ray, as in mire, cohere, roar, L 8. 4. When I is the last consonant and followed by a vowel, lay should be used, as in Rowley, scaly, folly. Exception. After ^_^ n and > - ng always use el, whether followed by a vowel or not, as in Conley, kingly, wrongly, L 4. 5. Final I is, indeed, most commonly struck upward, even though not followed by a vowel, as in bile, assail; but when not followed by a final vowel, is always struck downward after ^_ /, ^ v, / ray, k, and Q sk, as it. fill, veal, nil, cool, scowl, L 5. HOOK AND CIBCLB MODIFICATIONS. 828. These rules are affected to some extent by the inter- vention of the s-circle and final hooks between / and r and the stems which immediately precede them. 1. The occurrence of a circle between two letters does away the need of an angle otherwise necessary. For exam- ple, ars may safely be written before t, as in Ariosto, though t cannot follow ar standing alone. In Mozart and miser, the occurrence of the circle renders it practicable to use ar, which is desirable in these cases. Instead of using ar after c kl, the intervention of o'tss makes it desirable to write ray, as in closer. Hence the occurrence of the s-circle in such connection does away the necessity of keeping angularity in view when choosing between upward and downward I and r. L6. 2. The occurrence of a final hook (n,f, or shn) in connec- tion with the stem which precedes I or r, has much to do REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 171 with determining the direction, upward or downward, of these letters. In most such cases it is convenient to strike them in one direction only, as will be apparent to the writer. For example, the n-hook occurring after \ p, \ t, / ch and their cognates, must necessarily be followed by ar or el, as in spinner, joiner, Stanley, blandly, L 6. After ^~^> ran, also, ar should be used, as in meaner. After fncT\ vn, as in finish, vanish. (e) Use shay always before c kr or -S| c -\ TRANSLATE. J76 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. words will be taken up and the best means of expressing them discussed. These words are: Victim torch risk clash; big beg bag; dignity dig dog; sell cell silly; sketch scotch leave love; cite set suit; do day Dow; see saw say so sue us; fie boo gee thaw ice shy soup sack coon; in any no know; men man human; ever her home though thus much hope young; knock mist mimic meek gnaw key; Michael Nichols Oilman; presumably phraseology ingenuity lawlessness purification. 338. Beginning with the first four words, victim, torch, risk, clash, it is plain that the unvocalized outlines are amply legible. Nothing would be gained, and it is entirely unnec- essary to write the first three words in the first position, or the last one in the third position. These outlines cannot be read any other way than - 1 victim, [/? torch, >* risk, J clash. This is why vowels are unneces- sary, and the very reason, too, why there is no need whatever of placing them elsewhere than on the line. 839. Taking next the words, \ big, \ beg, bag, it will be found that although all have the same outline, there is no need of vowels, since no two are the same part of speech, the first being an adjective, the second a verb, and the third a noun. In such cases no ambiguity can possibly arise; to illustrate, \__ = could not be read beg gun, or bag gun,' ^-~~^^ \_ would not be read money beg, etc. Hence, if vowels are unnecessary, observing position, that is, writing big above, and bag through the line, is equally useless. It takes time, and to that extent impedes the writer; it is unnecessary, and hence bad practice. (The words bug and buggy should be vocalized, to avoid a possible conflict.) I Dignity, \ dig, \_ _ dog, have a uniform REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 177 outline, but these words differ so much in meaning that they fall under the rule just stated. Under this rule also come sell, 6 cell, C silly, /^ sketch, / scotch, etc. 340. The next three, touch, teach, attach, we find are all verbs, and of the same kind (transitive). Hence, if I t-ch, the outline common to all, were written in the second posi- tion for each, and without vowels, serious conflict would frequently arise. To avoid this teach (containing a. first-place vowel) is written in the first position, and attach (containing a third-place vowel) in the third position. The writer is de- layed much less by the writing of a word in position, than by putting in a vowel afterwards. Upon this fact depends chiefly the value of the scheme of three positions. Under . this "tile come also the verbs, ....... leave (1 pos.) and (\ love (2 pos.); .J*. cite (1 pos.), I set (2 pos.), fL***** (3 pos). 341. In I do, I day, and l\ Dow, the last is vocalized for the reason that the principle of position is not employed in expressing proper names. The simple stem ) s is employed in see, saw, say, so, use, us, the first two being written in the first, and the last two in the third position. Say and so are so frequent that it is found expedient to strike us through the line, although the vowel is second place. 342. Position cannot safely be used to indicate vowels in words that are short, or but little used; particularly those IV containing but a single consonant letter, such as V_ fie, \x 600, /" gee, ( thaw, ) ice, J shy, \ soup, o _ . sack, ^ coon. It is here necessary to express the vowels, and to do so the dots and dashes must be written. 343. In the next group, ....in, ...... uny,v^/no, know, 178 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. the second word, any, containing a second-place accented vowel, is nevertheless written in the first position to avoid conflict with no, a word of opposite meaning, but the same part of speech. Here no, a more frequent word than any, is given the easier position, namely, on Ihe line, where nearly all words of frequent occurrence are written. 844. A further illustration of this principle may be found ^~a in men, ^ man, >-^' human, occupying respectively the first, second, and third positions. In all such cases the commonest word is placed on tlie line, the less frequent in the first, and the least frequent in the third position. It is in ac- cordance with this principle that ever and her (second-place vowels), are assigned to the first position; and home, though, thus, much, hope, young (also second-place vowels), are assigned to the third position. 345. Outlines containing only horizontal or half-length stems are almost invariably wi'itten above the line if the ac- /""^^ cented vowel is first-place, as in ^ knock, mist, mimic. This rule applies although the vowels are actually written, as in ." meek, '. gnaw, ."... key. Proper names also come under this rule; for example, Michael, Nichols, Oilman. This practice is accounted for largely by the fact that it is a very easy matter to write horizontal letters in the first position, which requires the pen to be carried no higher than when executing second-place upward or downward stems. Vocal- ized words are then read much easier in cases where the vowel signs are not written accurately in place, as, for ex- ample, ..* would easily be read meek, for "make would in no case be put above the line. 346. Lengthy word-forms, with scarcely any exceptions, are written on the line, no matter what the accented vowel REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 179 be, as in * / phraseology, ~^ presumably, *~^\ ingenuity. Legibility would not be increased in any decree by writing such words in any other position. 347. Position is indicative of but one vowel only in any particular word, and for this reason it need not be observed except in writing monosyllables and dissyllables. A few long derivatives are located off the line, in order to preserve the po- sition of their primitive; illustration, lawlessness; purification. 348. From these observations are deduced the following rules: 1 . Words that are plainly legible in the second portion, without vowels, are written uniformly on the line. Illustrative words: Dislike dismiss picnic deceive legal Bible reveal blank district design decide cloth batch clear vital desire deny chatter deliver define distrust battle. 2. Several words, different parts of speech, but having the same outline, are all written usually in the same position. Illustrative words: Inch notch; several savior; deal daily; small smell; field failed; bath both. 3. Words that are both short and of frequent occurrence may be written out of the second position to indicate a first or third place accented vowel. Illustrative words: These sight office offset easily least abuse issue outside plan past. 4. Lengthy outlines and infrequent words are written in the second posilion,and the vowels inserted when necessary. Illustra- tive words: Vast star cast stitch plaster elegant slay disband voice seige soil entice. 5. An exception is made in favor of horizontal word-forms, which are placed in the first position whenever the accented vowel it first-^' e, whether written or not. T 1u istrative words: Sick 180 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAlfD. nigh sneak seem honest mist cost midst mind syndicate sink medium. 6. The principle of position is not applied in writing proper names. Miles Clyde Hotter McCluru Root Hugel. 7. In a number of cases an outline, especially a word-sign, whose principal vowel is second place, is written nevertheless in the first or third position, to oroid conflict with a more frequent second- position word having the same outline. E. g. Ago apply issue own away awake July. 8. Position is used quite extensively jor the reason that the com- paratively small number of words falling under the above rules are all of very frequent occurrence, and it is essential always to give them their proper place. E. g. The is I me of at about. 9. Half-length words, derived from full-length outlines, retain the same consonant position as their primitives. E. g. * Com- 1 plained, ^ played, *\ remembered, numbei . ... tried. 10. Half-length outline* are written one full space above the line if first-position, and entirely below the line ij third position. E. g. Meet, "* did-not, doubt, found PHRASES. 349. All-that-has-been-done does-not-come does-not-exist has-not-yet-been have-been-taken has-not-only how-little I-am-disposed in-the-course-of-my in-their-report in-this- instance in-this-shape in-this-way into-the-country it-can- not-be it-has-been-found it-has-not-only-been I-think-that- it-is it-is-not-true it-may-be-true it-is-not-done it-may-be- made it-may-be-maiutained shall-be-received it-should-be- come-necesary. EXERCISE 34. 850. NEW- YORK, June 26, 1886. MESSRS. S. T. HORNE & Co., Pittsburgh, Pa. Dear- Sirs: Your-favor of-the 24th inst. received and-con- tents noted. The-box of residuum has come to hand. This- is-certainly not-the-result of-the use of-our oil; but-is-no- REPORTIXQ STYL^ OF SHORT-HAXD. 181 doubt caused by-the impurities in-the-water you speak of, which gradually collect in-the cylinder and-which-would-be- present, no matter what grade of oil were used. We-shall- turn it over at-once to-our chemist for close analysis, and- will report to-you as-soon -as we ascertain the-result. Of- one-thing you-may-be-sure, it-is-not-caused by-the oil. We await reply to-our respects of-the 2*2nd inst. (To be phrased by the student.) Dear Sir: Inclosed please find invoice and B. L. of goods shipped Mr. James 11. Canfield on the 8th inst. Also find directions for applying, which please forward Mr. Canfield, as we have not his P. O. address. Not being acquainted with Mr. Canfield, or his commercial standing, we have charged the shipment to you, in pursuance of instructions given us by your representative. (1962:301:30.) 351. \ TRANSLATE. Y ^f 14/86. .....I \> L \ LESSON XXXV. VOCALIZATION. 852. KEY. 1. Being bayonet Daugherty poern dual boa clayey laity stoic. 2. Powell Howell Rowell tower bias Hyatt piety joyous. 3. Inaugural error glue-factory fire-eater mill-owner > headache inane. 4. Cube tube view mew dew Jew few lieu. 5. Idiot Sulliote carrion sermon meteor tare chair ask task. 6. Goest fealty , coagulate pean vowel towel dower variety. 7. Oyster isle awning Ed., etc., (vowels to be written previously to the stems). SENTENCES. 1. Heaven lies about us in our infancy. 2. Conscience warns us as-a-friend before it punishes us :i-- a-judge. 8. Hope is like a-bad clock, forever striking the- hour of happiness whether it-has come or-not. 4. The-first- and-last thing which is required oi genius is-the-love of-truth. 5. Christ saw-much in-the-world to weep over and-much to pray over, but he-saw nothing in-it to-look on with contempt. 6. Advice is seldom welcome. PHRASES. 14. In-their-own in-any-event in-such-a-vvay a-just-answer as-a-matter-of-course capital-stock charge- of-the-matter. 15. Charge-of-the-business condition-of- affairs just-about-as-good-as first-class-rate just-taken knowledge-of-the-matter second-hand. 353. Very few vowels are written. Whole pages of short- hand notes are taken without one dot or dash appearing. The vowels are there, nevertheless. The reader does not see them, but observes the effect which these same vowels, acting as invisible forces, have in giving shape to the consonant outlines. These consonant outlines are so pliant, that within certain limits they readily assume whatever form the vowel element of the words would indicate-, just as a large piece of bark would inform us of both the size and kind of the unseen tree upon which it had grown. A knowledge of vowels is important, because word-forms to a great extent depend upon the number, order, and character of these elements. 354. The student's chief concern is to know when to write, 182- Slate 35. 184 REPORTING STYLE OF and when not to write, the vowel sounds. He can, however, be supplied with no specific rule. He m>it exercise his own judgment in applying this general rule, viz.: In reporting, insert as many vowels as may be strictly necewary to render the notes easily decipherable when the transcript it afterwards made. More vowels than these are superfluous, and ought not to be written. Just what, however, is meant by " easily decipher- able?" Some persons require the notes to be pretty fully vocalized, or they find themselves at sea when the report is to be rewritten. There are some few writers who dispense with vowels almost entirely. They form their characters well, choose accurate outlines, and bring to bear au excep- tional judgment and memory in writing out their reports afterwards. Those who use vowels to quite an extent learn to depend on them, and the practice becomes necessary mainly through force of habit. 355. There are a few general principles, however, which should govern all writers. To illustrate, we will, for con- venience, divide all words into three classes: 1st class. This comprises those words whose consonant outlines are fortunately so full and characteristic, as to ren- der the word plainly legible without the aid of a vowel. The following words will illustrate: \ Traffic, \^~s Driv- en, 4 charter, V*^ sermon, J desk. Ordinarily, to write a single vowel here would be bad practice. The consonants tell plainly what the words are. When this is the case vowel signs are only in the way. To be more specific, let us exam- ine a few of the principal means by which vowels are indi- cated, by the manner of combining consonants. First, itwould be utterly needless to write a final vowel in ^- -- money, /) racy, ) mazy, ^^ coffee, c\^ heavy, for the long n, 3, z, f, and v, clearly signify a following vowel. Otherwise hooks and circles would be used. Likewise in REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 185 escape and ^) espy, the initial vowel is plainly indi- K cated by the use of ) s instead of the circle. The employment of stems for I and r, where the hooks could be written, indi- \' sf \. V cates that a vowel precedes, as in Vv porch, \f bulk. This is also true of the loops, lengthening, shortening, and other abbreviating principles. The writer's rule should be to compel consonant signs, so far as possible, to express vowel sounds also; vowels so expressed need not, of course, be written. 856. 2nd class. This includes a much smaller number of words, which are always to be vocalized. To this class be- long such words as l~ dope, / coach, \^1 foul, ~T~ echo. These words require vowel*., oecause their outlines are so meagre. When standing alone they would be either ambig- uous, or indefinite. This class is composed of words having only one or two consonants, containing usually a long vowel. They are not words that recur frequently. When one of these, however, is repeated a number of times in a single report, the vowels may be omitted after the second writing, particularly if the writer is pressed for time. 857. 8rd class. This embraces quite a numerous list of words which sometimes are, and sometimes are not to be vocalized, depending upon the connection in which they occur. Take the word box, for example, in the sentence, ' ' He brought home a box of candy." Here no vowel is neces- *\ A sary. But in the sentence, " . Maxley, not written - > & (6) If the word is compound, each part should be vocalized 183 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-fJAXD. separately, as ^ plough-share, \ cowboy. (c) The separate parts, when they are quite distinct, or the components of a derivative word, are vocalized separate- ly, as in Q, uninstanced, f* Lulu-land, | excit- able. The assignment is also governed to some e ctent by syllabication; to illustrate, canonade is written ^""^ not ^^] The advanced writer may safely use his wn best judgment in this matter. 363. Means have been provided for expressing a vowel which occurs between circle-s and the eshun-hook. as a in compensation; but in no case whatever is this necessary. It will aid the reader if he will remember that there is always a vowel to be supplied between a circle and this hook, and that without a single exception, this vowel is either long a, as in compensation, short i, as in supposition, or short e, as in possession. 364. A few remarks concerning diphthongs and coales- cents are in place here. A diphthong, literally double-sound, is supposed by most persons to be two sounds in one. whereas it is in reality a glide, or sort of leap, from one sound to an- other. In producing it the vocal organs undergo a constant and rapid change of position. Hence a diphthong might properly be called a curved sound. But the vocal organs re- main in & fixed position while producing what may be termed elementary vowels, and on this account the dots and dashes might be considered as representing straight sounds. They are capable of prolongation, while the diphthongs are not. The aspirate dot may precede diphthongs and coales- cents, also, as in <[ whet, v | height. Since no other char- acter is similar to v I, it may be written in the 1st, 2nd REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 188 or 3rd place, according to convenience, as in N > ' nigh, \j v belie. 865. The consonants, w and y, known as coalescents, are not strictly independent sounds, but are rather a kind of accent, or sharpening impulse, by which any vowel may be modified. It may be said that w gives a stress, or accentua- tion, to the vowel by means of the lips; whereas y sharpens the vowel by means of the palate and tongue. The character u is employed to express both the coalescent , as in youth, and the diphthong ew, as in view. There is a real, though but slight difference between these two sounds. To f ende>, this distinction more apparent, add th to view, thus, viewth. From this subtract v, and the remaining letters spell iewth, which in pronunciation plainly differs from youth. 866. Observe the following rules as to the manner of placing the vowels: (a) First and second place initial vowels can best be written previously to the remaining part of the word. (6) The dash in such words as x_ foe, \ bow, should be struck downwards. 367. UNACCENTED AND OBSCURE VOWELS. An instructor of short-hand is not so much concerned in pointing out what are the precise sounds in any word, as in teaching how best to express them. Nevertheless, a few observations relative to what are called obscure vowels are in place. Every writer is occasionally required to represent words with exactness, the vowel as well as the consonant elements. But vowel sound is so intangible that the keenest ear is sometimes un- able to determine the precise quantity and quality of the minor shades. When written at all, these are usually ex- pressed by proximate signs. For example, the following words, fully vocalized, would ordinarily be . written, Denied, X^\ polar, rf later, f refer, |/\ Urri- 190 REPORTING STYLE OF conforrr^ty, t conformation. Put good speakers do not pronounce them so. Vented is pronounced ventd; polar, polr; later, latr. Also, Bibl, collr, contenld, stratm, deacn. In. conformation^ the second vowel is not broad o, as in wrong, but short, as o in lot. Hereo receives neither the primary nor secondary accent, and as a rule un- accented vowels, like those italicised in the derivative words given below, though marked long in dictionaries, are in real- ity short. In refer, e is short. In the following list the italicised letters are, in correct speech, given the short sound: .Avail, defend, reduction, await, conformation, progression, exposi- tion. In terrible, does not represent either the long or short sound of '. It is a slight, indefinable sound, classed by lexicographers as obscure. Terrible would be pronounced the same though spelt terrable, terreble, terroble, or terrwble. Likewise stratum could be spelt strati'm, stratem, stratom, stratam. The italicised letters in the following list are also more or less obscure: Conformity, presentable, radical, chaplain, intangible. Notwithstanding these statements, the most convenient, and perhaps the most sensible rule, in vocalizing, is to follow the guidance of a standard dictionary. Exceptions need be made only when exactness is required. PHRASES. 368. I-have-also I-may-have-seen in-all-its-bearings in- all-other-respects in-all-probability in-any-degree in-~.ny- other-country in-any-other-manner in-any-other-way in- every-case in-every-respect in-favor in-so-many-words in- substance in-its-nature in-its-own-way in-that-matter in- that-respect in-that-shape in-that-way about-as-much-as better-kind better-way condition-of-our condition-of-their just-about. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 191 369. EXERCISE 85. Dear-Sir: We-have-a car of hominy chop en route, which- will-arrive in-two-or-three days and-will sell you several tons of-same at $16.75, sight draft. Will send sample in day or two; have-none on-hand at-present. We credit your acct. with $1.00 on last 100 bu. of oats as requested, and-hope same will-be-satisfactory. Yours-truly, etc. Dear-Sir: Replying-to-your-favor of-the 6th, we beg to say that if-the S. S. S. is-in-good condition we-have-no-ob- jection to-receiving it back, provided, of-course, that-it-is returned without expense to us. We regret to say that-we- have-no demand for-the Hamilton troches. Your account has-now been credited $15 on Winslow's syrup, as-per your-card of-the 2d. Yours-very-truly, etc. (150 1:45 :45.) 370. TRANSLATE. \ LESSON XXXVI. PRIMITIVE AND DERIVATIVE. 371. KEY. 1. Mean meaning meaningly meaningless meaner meanest meanness meanly demean meant. 2. Care caring uncaring careless carelessly carelessness careful carefulness. 8. Plain plains complain complainant complaining plainer plainest plainness plainly. 4. Do does doing done undo undoing undid undone doest doer did didst. 5. Settle settles settled settling settler settle- ment unsettle unsettled. 6. Sale sales salable unsalable seller selling undersell sold. 7. Knife-grinder planing- mill cutting-box street-car market-basket hen-roost coast- survey. 8. Shooting-star short-winded dog-collar flower- pot hail-storm sheep-pen. 9. Express-car button-hole wild-cat chess-board cuff-holder mail-carrier. 10. Drug- store hay-stack drum-stick live-stock rain-cloud chairman easy-chair. PHRASES. 11. It-will-be-maintained it-would-not-take I- will-not-undertake if-it-be so-as-to-be-able-to under-circum- stances we-are-satisfied we-do-not-undertake. SENTENCES. 1. It-has-been well observed that few are better qualified to give others advice than those-who-have taken the-least of-it themselves. 2. Our happiness in-this- world depends-upon the-affections we-are able-to inspire. 8. He who purposes to-be an-author should-first-be-a student. 4. No-man-can-be brave who-considers pain to-be the-great evil of-life, nor temperate, who considers pleasure to-be-the highest good. 872. It can be demonstrated that the outline '"~\_^ m-nst (for meanest) can be written a trifle quicker than the outline mn-st. A one-minute test of each will show that the first can be written the greater number of times. The latter form, ^~j> mnsi, however, is the accepted outline for mean- esf. There are two reasons for this. First, it is easier read. This is owing to the fact that the mind is already familiar with ^^ inn as the outline for the primitive word mean, 192- 36. 2c x-T> \ s ! J ' E r V \ C \o< 10 L, t meanest, the reporter's first and instantaneous thought is, how to write "~^ mean, and next est; and he has the word entirely written in the time it would take to determine, mentally, that m-nst would be the easier to execute. For tho same reason it is better to write meaner and meanly by the outlines, mn-r and mn-l, rather than by m-nr and m-nl. In this list (L 1) it will be observed that the forms are determined partly by the sound, partly by the sense, or meaning; that is, when there is nothing to prevent, words of similar meaning are expressed by similar outlines. This is called writing by an- alogy, which experience proves to have several advantages. In general, derivative words are written in analogy with their primitives, the derivative being expressed by simply prefixing or affixing certain signs to the primitive word-form. See Ls 2 6. It is important to preserve intact the primitive word-forms; hence, the parts of derivative words are some- times separated, as in ft unsettle, ** uncivil, in I C N preference to ^~-$/~ and P 373. Write: Great greatly greater gicatness; nice nicer niceness nicely nicety; free freely freer frees free- ing freed freedom; joy joys enjoy enjoyed enjoyer enjoying joyous joyously joyousness joyful joyfully joy- fulness; gain gains gainer gaining gainful ungainly regain regaining gained \ingaining; grow grows grower grown grew ungrown ungrowing; slave slaves slaved slaving slaver enslaving enslaved enslavement enslaver; make makes maker making makest remake unmake REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 196 m.ule u:ini;ule; keep keeps kept keeping keeper keepest unkept; stone stoner stonest stones stoned unstoned restone restoned stony stonier stoniest. 37 i. For precisely the same reason, compound words are to he writ: I") by simply joining the two word-forms together, neither outline being impaired. The characters thus pro- duced are easily read, because each outline is as easily recognized as when standing alone. This practice, also, is favorable to speed, since not the least premeditation is re- quired. The consonants in the word \ overdrawn, are vrttrn, and these could be expressed by the character, 7 \^ > vrd-rn; but this would be a very improper outline for overdrawn; it is neither analagous or suggestive. For the same reason V^^ foretell should not be written \\ \ md-rt-r must be discarded for the more angular form ,-v^-^l md-r-tr. On the same principle we write | . edu- cator, \- voter, /\ artist, etc. The second exception is the reqoirementot facility. Many times a derivitive may he as clearly and more quickly ex- pressed by a simple modification of the primitive word-form. For illustration, editor is written U d-tr, not d-t-r; teacher is written L t-chr, instead of J t-ch-r; walker \ not w-ic-r; sadder is written 1 not sd-r. In the Solemn Style, the consonants are fully expressed; ~^7 V '/-^ e. g., k goeth, \i .^epest, ( lookest, ^ goest, prayelh. 876. SIGN- WORD DERIVATIVES. A (?ood nuraoer of wordi whose primitives are expressed by abbreviations, are funned irregularly; for example, ... here, primitive, /\ hereto- fore, derivative; ^ hand, ~^-^} handy; .... collect, I collector. Also see Vocabulary for: Descriptive emphatically fewest improved changed largest inajr-tir dismember methodically ministered objective particulari/.e particularity peculiarity performed regi iarity specially specialty subjective wilt younges- i xpf<-;- 1. liEPORTINQ STYLt? OF SUQRT-HAXD. 197 j The past tense is expressed by the loop, the disjoined ted, ; and by tialving; e.g., \> express, \ expressed; \ oft/ecJ, \| objected; ^^ enlarge, ...... enlarged; \ - member, ^ remembered. Write: Appeared applied belonged happened unheard unnumbered owned unpeopled disqualified valued ac- knowledged allowed (l-d) considered described developed governed measured. The words dated, gifted, delighted, are better written PI **** r , than by the characters |> j, although in each ease an extra t is expressed. Not only are the out- lines briefer, but the exact primitive word-forms are pre- served. This rule may be applied in expressing the past tense of verbs generally, whether they are sign-words or not; e. g., \ appointed, \. subjected, ^ ] dis-spirited, ^~^ culti- vated. By far the greater number of sign-word derivatives are formed in the usual way, by simply attaching the proper affix or prefix. >-T\ v. r / / 1 / ^t/ .... -> T / LESSON XXXVU. SYLLABICATION. 381. KEY. 1. Plen-ty chos-en re-frain pro-found can- did ser-mon vix-en splen-did stru-ggle. 2. Ter-min-ute will-ing-ly re-cov-er cann-on-ade re-du-pli-cate ca-li-bre Bra-ttle-bo-ro. 8. Ex-ter-min-ate trou-ble-some ex-ca-vate des-ig-nate ty-po-graph-er oc-ta-gon fan-tast-ic. 4. Freed-om ret-urn det-ach dus-ty chea-pen ve-ri-fy dee-per bran-ches man-if-old. 5. Ex-trav-a-gant occ-u-pant def-i-nite ex- per-i-ment mon-stros-i-ty pLot-o-graph-er chro-nol-o-gy. 6. Bulk fork march forge milk forth birth roared. 7. Stu-dy stead stayed ous-ted bread bored bir-die bo-rrow-ed. 8. Wor-ker pur-chas-er di-gest-ive dis-tur-lier re-fus-al sol-dier la-bor-er. PHRASES. 9. Somewhere-else which-would-be which- would-make which-had-been which-has-just-been all-you- wish no-more-than-you-can did-you-wish. SENTENCES. 1. A-man's character is-the reality of him- self; his reputation the-opinion others have-formed about- him; character resides in him, reputation in other people; that-is-the-substance, this-the shadow. 2. A-small leak will sink a-great ship. 3. A-fool may-make money, but it needs a wise-man to-spend it. 4. All is-not gained that-is put into-the purse. 5. Tell-your secret to-your-servant and- you make-him your-master. 6. If-you-would have a-thiug well done, do-it yourself. 382. Referring to the words found in Ls 1 and 2, it will IH> found that there are as many stems exactly as there are syl- lables, that is to say, a consonant letter, or stroke, lor eurli syllable of each word. This is not a mere coincidence, It holds true with the greater number of words. What is the explanation? In the first place, only one-third of all the consonant sounds are indicated by stems; the remaining two- thirds are expressed by adjunctive signs so called, that is, hooks, circles, loops, etc. A certain number of stems must be used, however, not simply as objects to which these :ul- aoo 208 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. junctive signs may be attached, but as affording a means also of vowel representation. A vowel can be appended to a consonant stem, but to nothing else. Hence, since tlie number of vowels and the number of syllables are of necessity always equal, the number of syllables and the number of steins are, logically, equal also. 883. An additional feature of importance is to be ob- served; all the elements of sound which are grouped into one syllable, are usually expressed by a single stem with its ap- pendages, that is, vowel signs, hooks and circles. To illustrate, in L_^ striven the first syllable striv is expressed by | t and its appendages, while the syllable en is represented by the stem ^ 'n, which is entirely distinct from the first stem. Also in plen-ty, and ter-min-ate, the different parts of the consonant outlines are as distinct from one another as are the syllables themselves. Thus, \ plen \ ty, p plenty, or I ter -"~i min *| ate, \^~^ terminate. It would be im- proper to write these words otherwise, as, for example, stri-ven, or K~x^ ter-mi-nate. The point of practical value to be observed by the writer is this: So far as possible choose outlines which are adapted, in the manner just indicated, to the syllabication of the words tftey represent; that is to s:iy, make a single stem, and its appendages, express all the sounds, and those only, which occur in the particular syllable you are writing. For example, see ex-ca-vate, des-ig-nate, ty-po-graph-er,ete.,L3. Illustrative words : Cir-cle pro-pose sca-tter wor-thy te-rri-ble bliss-ful ser-vice cov-er ma-ker brace-let .Broad-way re-cord. See also ~L 8. 884. To this rule there are two exceptions. The first is occasioned by a requirement of brevity. Return, for in- stance, is not written ''"I/* re-turn, but ~\/ } rct-urn, REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAtfD. 208 which is the more desirable outline. So freedom is written, freed-om (frd-m, see L 4), instead of free-dom (i. e., fr-d-m). The illustrative words in L 4 show the number of syllables and stems to be equal, a result obtained by the manner of syllabising each word; thus, chea-pen, ve-ri-fy, instead of cheap-en, ver-i-fy f 885. The consonant stem and its appendages is sometimes, for convenience, called a stenographic syllable. When prac- ticable, the stenographic and orthographic syllables should correspond with each other. Otherwise a re-syllabication of the word miHt take place. A syllable is defined as a number of sounds, all of which are uttered with one articulation. An important fact in this connection must not, however, be overlooked. When a word of several syllables is pronounced, it is impossible to say to what particular syllable some of the consonant sounds belong. For instance, in strip-ling, or stri-pling, or stripl-ing. In pronouncing pendant, there is nothing Avhatever in the spoken word to indicate that d be- longs to the first syllable, or to the last. In dictionaries, words are divided into syllables on a basis of sense, or mean- ing; while short-hand syllabication is more a matter of sound; or, it may be said, still more a matter of form in the construc- tion of outlines. 386. It often happens that vowels must be placed on each side of a stem, since many syllables contain a vowel only, and no consonant, as in ex-trav-a-gnnt, occ-u-pant. (See L 5.) Here there are fewer stems than syllables. On the other hand, many word-forms cannot be abbreviated sufficiently to reduce the separate strokes to the number of vowels, as in bulk, fork, etc., L 6. In L 6 the words are all monosyllables, each requiring, however, three stems for its expression. Still again, there are a few words containing one consonant only, but with three vowels, as I-o-wa, i-de-a, a-re-a, i-o-ta. On the whole, a careful examination will show that there are nearly as many stems, or stenographic syllables, as there are vowels, or orthographic syllables. The result of a com- 804 HEPORT7XO STYLE OP SHORT-HAXD. parison would be affected materially by the various devices for expressing two syllables with one stroke, as in mat-ter, fash-ion, go-est, mas-ter. 387. Short-hand writing 5 1 * suggestive, and hence the more legible in this regard, that us the sounds are grouped tn />.- <>- nunciation, so the signs are grouped in writing. The con- sonants may be said to cluster around the vowel, which is the heart, or centre, of the syllable; and in a similar manner the brief signs cluster about the stem to which they are ap- pended. PHRASES. - . So-long-a-time such-as-are such-as-cau riuch-as-was- u..: iy take-place takes-up take-possession there-is-no-siu-h thcie-will-never there-would-not-now they-can-make they- can-receive they-can-uow to-believe to-its to-niak-'-inen- tioa to-that-extent that-is-all that-it-is-claimed that-Ls-the- very-clear very-long-time we-have-reccived wc-shall- l>.'-al)le-to-make liquor-dealers liq.ior-sellera long-before -profession may-have-seen m;ly-not-have morning- b:i>iness more-than-that national-bank national-defence native-land not-very-long-ago nor-is-it-necessary purchase- inoney relied-upon shall-be-liable should-have-had so-as- t:>-make so-as-uot-to-make so-long-as-it-is. 389 EXERCISE 37. (To be phruxcd by tlic student.) INDIANAPOLIS, IND., April 4, 1886. To WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: The bearer hereof, Air. Henry Hopkins, has been in our employ for five years past as confidential clerk and book- keeper. We have always found him faithful in the discharge of his duties, courteous and obliging, and alive to the inter- est of his employers. Mr. Hopkins is a superior accountant, and well qualified to discharge any of the duties he may undertake. It gives us pleasure to recommend him to any who may require such services, knowing that he will he- found reliable in whatever capacity he may be engaged. Your-, i-tr. (100 1:10 :40.) TRANSLATE. \ ( /=> v -f ~2- ' . ^~ / ' a"-- /' I ' V --J- \ v^ r A- 1' Y A S\ A k -3 X /\ p i \ > ....... <0 \ c rv \ o^ LESSON XXXVIII. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 891. KEY. 1. Editor debtor auditory, spinney aspen spin; stop estop steep. 2. State estate situate; pearly peril poorly; Clara clear color. 8. Crown cranny corn; Saturday sturdy stride; straight start strata. 4. Crowd carried Corday; briar brewery barrier; prate pretty up- right. 5. Great gritty garrote; manilla manual meanly; meant minuet minute. 6. Cant county aconite; policy place police; Stella settle still. 7. Easter story star; wrecked Orcutt rocket; around round ruined. 8. Tent tenet attenuate; sent senate ascent; Scott socket asked. 9-13. For key see list words, sec. 404. PHRASES. 14. How-long during-the-winter-season satis- factory-manner last-mail first-class first-class-goods joint- committee Board-of-Trade. 15. On-the-west-side Articles- of-Association bill-of-sale court-of -justice articles-of-agi < - ment according-to-your we-may-be-able-to relating-to-the- subject. 892. A SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM. To be broadly capable, read- ily acquired, and easily remembered, a short-hand system must be scientific, not merely expeditious. A collection of arbitrary expedients, if sufficiently large, may serve for re- producing ordinary discourse; but the inventiveness of the reporter, or the old cumbersome long-hand, must be resorted to when newly coined words, unusual proper names, tech- nical terms or provincialisms are encountered. A system, to be scientific, must have a basis of principle; be so related to known sciences as to be quickly apprehended; so facile as to be eq'ial to any emergency of speed, dialect, hoi rowed words, or f >reign name or accent. The Pitman Phonography meets the T W8 REPORTING STYLE OF 8BOBT-HAND, acter of the system will appear more clearly from the fol- lowing considerations: 393. CORRELATION. The twenty -iour consonants are di- vided into several classes, according to their nature and quality. The tirst eight are termed explodents, sometimes called abrupts. The sounds which these letters express are blunt, not capable of being prolonged. All remaining letters, except w, y and h, are designated as continuants, by which is meant that the sounds they express are capable of being prolonged, or continued. They are properly represented by curved, or yielding, stems. The second classification, which affects most consonants, is into subvocals, as 6, d, v; and surds, as p, J\ t. The first class, or heavy sounds, are represented by shaded letters; whereas the surds, or light, breath sounds, are appropriately expressed by thin stems. Looking further, it will be observed also that p and b, t and d, f and v, s and ?, etc., are similar sounds, both letters of each pair being articulated with the same vocal organs, the only difference being that in each case the first is light, and the second, heavy. P and b are similar sounds in these respects, that both are labials, or lip-sounds, and both explodents; and the two characters by which they are represented are alike in respect to slant and straightness. They differ in this respect only, that the first is light, and the second, heavy; whereas their stems differ in a similar manner, the first being thin, and the second, thick. The same observations apply to t and d, ch and j, f and v, and the other pairs of consonants. The long vowels, also, are properly expressed by shadf?, and the short by light signs. Diphthongs are compound sounds, and their symbols likewise are double, two in one. 394. ECONOMY. Certain sounds, it is well known, are much more frequent than others. Tands occur the often* -( . R and are far more common than /, ^or j. The si^us which represent the frequent sounds are, as a rule, easier to execute than those which express sounds lesr Common. For REPORTING STYLK OF SHOR7-HAND. 209 example, t is written more quickly than r or sh, anf 1 s than/, etc. But in order to provide a still more expeditious way of writing the most frequent sounds, a series of adjunctive signs, sometimes called the short alphabet, has been devised. n must be employed in V_,^ funny, to give place for the final vowel; while in \> fun the hook should be used, because no vowel follows n. The first word- form V-,, may be said to be open, i. e., open to vocalization; while xs fun, so far as a final vowel is concerned, is con- sidered closed. Now, all consonant outlines are open more or less, and the extent to which they should be left open de- pends almost entirely upon the number and location of the vowels which any given word contains. An outline is the more open, when it contains a greater number of stems; and the more closed, depending on the number of short or ad- junctive signs used in it. The rule is to write the word-form the more open, the greater the number of vowels to be ex- pressed. This is, moreover, as much a matter of manner as of extent. To illustrate, in j Austin (stn) we have the long s and the short n; while in \^ stony (also stn) we have the short s and the long n. Hence, the outline must be lelt open at those particular points where the vowels occur. Where no vowels occur, the outline should, if possible, be closed. Then the reader, the moment his eye meets an outline, knows precisely where vowels are, and where they are not to be, supplied. A short-hand sentence may be compared to a string of different colored beads, in reading which a vowel is to be supplied for each white (or blank) bead. So far as REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 213 consonant outlining is concerned, the principle is the same whether the vowels are actually written or not. Thus /""^_^ many must be written with long n; otherwise it would be mistaken for men. Ordinarily it is bad practice to write a word-form too brief for vocalization, or more open than is required. The vowel element, although invisible, is in reality the mould which gives shape to the characters, and at the same time the key by which to unlock the translation. Keeping in view this guiding principle, the student will understand the application of the following 399. RULES governing the choice between long and short consonant signs. 1. CIRCLES. If s is the first consonant, but preceded by a vowel, as in 2 escape, or the last consonant, followed by a vowel, as in ' ) glossy; or if in any case it is preceded -*?\ , by two concurrent vowels, as in / chaos, the long J s is always employed. In all other circumstances use the circle. The large circle is nearly always used for ss, sz, etc., when the intervening vowel is short; unless there are no other consonants in the word, as J' says, or J sis. 2. It AND R HOOKS, (a) When I or r immediately follows any consonant to which a hook may be attached, use the hook, unless the r may be better expressed by the str-loop. (6) When a long vowel intervenes, use the stem, (c) When a short vowel intervenes, use the hook, except in words of one syllable, when the stem is usually employed. 3. F AND N HOOKS, (a) The/ hook is attached to straight letters only, (b) F and v when final, not followed by a vowel, are expressed by hooks; if a vowel follows, use the stem. 814 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HA.VD. (c) When occurring in the middle of a word, use the hook, unless angularity requires a stem. 4. LOOPS, (a) The consonants st or zd, when consecutive, are usually expressed by the loop. (6) When occurring medially, the loop is also used whenever angularity will ad- mit; e. g., 'f~* suggestion; but V^> vested, not K> (c) If si is preceded by an initial, or followed by a final vowel, the 1 1 loop cannot be used; e. g., u testy, not fi (d) The str loop is almost invariably employed at the end of words, rarely ever initially or medially. 5. LENGTHENED CURVES. Some restrictions are placed upon the use of lengthened letters, (a) If a word-form con- taining a lengthened curve will admit of two leadings, with the liability of conflict, as V father, fetter, the less com- mon word must be written otherwise, (b) It is customary in cases of conflict to give the preference to words which contain, 1st, tr, 2nd, dr, 3rd, thr. Examples, ^ --^ matter, \ () madder, order, effect. In this case the resulting word-form has the appearance of lengthened/ 1 . .,) Ordinarily, a consonant in one syllable is not halved to express a t which belongs to a folio wing syllable. 400. Fig. 1 Fig. 2. Right curve. Left curve. Referring to Fig. 1, it will be seen that in executing it the first stroke is the downward ~^\ r; following this we have _J sh; afterwards f~ I, ^-^ m, ) s, etc. These are right curves, that is, arcs which are the components of a circle written to the right. A full list of right curves is as follows: s, ish, lay, ar, m, z, zh, w, and mp. List of left curves: /, ith, n, el, shay, v, the, ng, and y. 401. Those words whose stems are all curves of one kind, that is, either left or right, are more easily written than mixed words, whose stems are partly right and partly left. The only exception is what is called the compound curve; e. g., ^^-~~- name, \^ far, J sh~ll, - v_^. many, etc. Illustrative words having -left outlines: ^ faith, enough, \^ ,. venison, \e> vessel. Right outlines: tlO REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. mail, f lame, J share, 4 s resume, f~ also. The words given are more facile than the mixed outlines, \^-^ famous, ^/\^s unloving, V^l facility, \*>-^ thump. It is according to a dynamical law that when the pen has struck a curve in a certain direction, either right or left, the impetus given it will carry it forward more easily in the same direction, while a change of direction incurs a slight loss of energy, and hence of time and speed. This principle is general in its application, and is employed quite exten- sively in the construction of word-forms. The choice be- tween el and lay, tsfi and shay, and the location of the shun- hooh, are usually decided by it. 402. The principle of right and left applies, in fact, to all short-hand characters which are not simple, unmodified straight stems, as^xjo, \ I, / j. To illustrate, the stem I si may be classed as left, because the circle is struck in that way; whereas ] str is right, the circle being written in the reverse direction. Figs. 3, 4, 5 and 6 show movements of which the right and left circles are parts. Fig. 3. Fig. 4. Fig. 5. Fig. Right. Lefl. Eight. Left. Hence, naturally, in swift writing there is a tendency to bend the t in str slightly to the right, making it appear like ) 8. This effect is quite unavoidable in very rapid execution. But an opposite circle added to either curve counteracts JQ stns, or |j sirs, t maintains its straightness, no matter how quickly the characters are written. The stems | tr and | tl are also right and left, for the REPORTING STYLF OF SHORT-HAND. 217 reason that the r and I hooks are parts of right and left cir- cles. All r-hook stems are right, and all 1-hook stems left. Also, all n-honk straight stems are right, and f-hook stems left. The principle applies to all hooks, loops and cii-cles. Examples of right stems: Examples of left stems: / ^ _-> Examples of compound stems: V -, r N> Difficult to execute: o n ^- \i J c-^ Easy to execute: Difficult to execute: L o_T 7 U V. Easy to execute: V L "X \ *7 40o. APPLICATIONS. (a) El, a, left curve, should be used after the left curves / and n; while lay, a right curve, should be used after the right curves r t m, and s. (b) Ar, a right curve, should be used after the right curves lay, w, and ish. (c) Shay, a left curve, is more easily written after/ than the right curve ish. 404. Write: Fadge dovetail in loco homologous paucity quid pro quo mediocre nullification confoundedly pro tanlo ne plus ultra subaltern dequantitate supernumerary residual subtrahend rive craunch amalgamate in toto cap-a-pie discumbency flagelliform hatchet faced baluster terra firma epigastric hypochondriac cornea oesophagus pylorus pulmonary venture tricuspid larynx clavicle 218 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. phalanges subclavian molar cerebellum intercostal Li cuspid philoprogenitiveness bronchial pericordium thorax vertebrw spinal-column pettifogger eureka cyclopedia ignoramus antiquarian ex-officio clodhopper screwdriver pliarmacopoliat helter-skelter pilaster cuspidate navicular pentapetalous sycamore. ' 405. EXERCISE 38. (To be phrased by the student., THE "IMMORTAL NINE." Owing to serious illness, resulting from the excitement and overwork of the canvass, 1 did not reach Washington till the 19th of December just in time to cast my vote lor speaker on the fifty-sixth ballot in this first important " dead-lock " in the organization of the House. With the exception of t\s o Indiana members, 1 had no personal acquaintance in either branch of Congress, and, on entering the old Hall of Repre- sentatives, my first thought was to find the Free Soil Mem- bers, whose political fortunes and experience had been so similar to my own. The seat of Mr. Giddings was pointed out to me in the north-west corner of the Hall, where 1 found the stalwart champion of free speech busy with his pen. He received me with evident cordiality, and at once sent a pa^e for the other free soil members. Soon the "Immortal Nine," as we were often sportively styled, were all together: David Wilmot, of Pennsylvania, then famous as the author of the "proviso," short and corpulent in person, and emphatic in speech; Preston Kin^, of New York, with his still more re- markable rotundity of belt, and a face beaming with pood humor; the eccentric and witty "Jo Root," of Ohio, always ready to break a lance with the slave-holders; Charles Allen, of Massachusetts, the quiet, dignified, clear-headed and genial gentleman, but a good fighter and the unflinching enemy of slavery ; Charles Durkee, of Wisconsin, the tine- looking and large-hearted philanthropist, whose enthusiasm never cooled; Amos Tuck, of New Hampshire, amiable and somewhat feminine in appearance, but firm in purpose; John W. Howe, of Pennsylvania, with a face radiant with smiles and good will, and full of anti-slavery fervor; and Joshua R. Giddings, of Ohio, with his broad shoulders, giant frame, unquenchable love of freedom, and almost as familiar with the slavery question in all its aspects as he was with the alphabet. These, all gone now to their reckoning, were the REPORTISQ STYLE Of SHORT -HA^D. 219 i elect of freeuom in the lower branch of this memoraole Con- gress. They all greeted me warmly, and the more so, per- haps, because my reported illness and doubtful recovery bad awakened a peculiar interest in my fortune at that time, on account of the political situation, and the possible signifi- cance of a singL vote. John P. Hale happened to enter the hall during these congratulations, and still further lighted up the scene by his jolly presence; while Dr. Bailey, of the "National Era," also joined in the general welcome, and at once confirmed all the good opinions I had formed of this courageous and single-minded friend of the slave. I was delighted with all my brethren, and at o-u-e entered fully into their plans and counsels. Selected from the " Political Recollections" of George W. Julian. (4665:303:30.) 406. TRANSLATE. 18/86. V "= <\ n ^\ Vr- k 1 LESSON NAMES AND NEGATIVES. 407. KEY. 1. ABCDEFGHIJKLM. 2. NOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 3. Burns Barnes Morse Morris Paul Peel Boyle Bailey Greely Gurley. 4. Beecher Holmes Carlyle Cicero Gough Hughes Kaincs Moore. 5. Steele Smiles Clay Jones Mirabeau Guizot Byron Hume. 6. Benjamin Brewster Alexander Arnold Bancroft Chesterfield Mitchell Sherman. 7. Shakespeare Webster Emerson Jefferson Hawthorne Napoleon Demos- thenes. 8. Oakland Omaha Boulder Cedar-Rapids Des- Moines Wheeling Topeka. 9. Kansas-City Chambersburg Boston Clinton Waterburg San-Francisco Cleveland. Translate Ls 10-13. 14. Mortal immortal moral immoral legal illegal regular irregular. 15. Immovable illiberal irredeemable immutable unnecessary else-than less-than. PBOPEB NAMES. 408. The following sentence will be found slightly ambig- uous: " J J f~) ^ _ \_ -3 x t may be translated, "The Monthly's Table of Contents contains another of the dozen poems, also an article on bacon." For " dozen " the reader may insert "Addison," and write "Bacon" with a capital. The correct meaning will then appear. Here the writer should have vocalized Bacon, and underscored Addi- son, as well as Monthly's. Also, if time permitted, Addison should have been interlined in long-hand. Proper names are arbitrary, as to the manner both of spelling and pronun- ciation. The reporter hears new ones every day, and they are likely to give him some trouble. This is partly on ac- count of the fact that names, considered merely as words, have a meaning, as Brown, Bacon, Rice, etc. This meaning has no connection, however, with the subject matter; but the reader is apt at times to confound common and proper 220 39. .\ ) I - v. _ /_ r r 15 282 REPORTING STYLE OF SfTORT-HAXD. nouns, if the outlines for the latter are not characterized in some way. The underscore, which signifies primarily that a capital is to be used, serves this purpose. There are many proper names, however, which, on account of their meagre outlines, require vocalization; for example, Steele, Clay, Hume, etc. (L 5.) The underscore, however, is not neces- sary when the name is vocalized. (Ls 4 and 5.) Vowels are always to be used if the outline is in the least ambiguous; as, for example, k-pr, which would signify either Cowper, or Cooper. L 3. 409. If a proper name occurs a number of times in a single report, the writer, particularly if pressed for time, may omit these features, writing the consonant outline merely. Every name that is in any way peculiar should, when practicable, be written in both long-hand and short-hand the first time it occurs in any report. The long-hand gives the spelling, which the short-hand does not do. The short-hand, however, gives the pronunciation, to which it is well known the long- hand often gives hardly a clue. If in Court, for instance, Miss K (~ / should be caJ'ed as a witness, and her name written in short-hand only, the proper spelling, Coralie Roth, would not be known when the notes came to be tran- scribed. In proper names both the spelling and pronunciation are important, and the name is not expressed entirely unless it is written by both methods. When the spelling cannot be had, the vowels should be written very carefully. 410. Initial letters are written in the manner indicated in Ls 1 and 2. It is entirely unnecessary, and hence im- proper, in writing names, to place a period, that is, the small cross, after each initial letter. Names that are so common as to be familiar to every one, as New York City, Smith, Chicago, London, etc., need not be either vocalized or under- scored. 411. Names are so numerous that a vocabulary of them could not well be memorized; and this would be unnecessary, REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 223 since the practical writer may readily invent sufficiently in- telligible outlines for the most difficult of them. The halving principle, circles, loops, and other adjunctive signs, should be employed more sparingly than when writing common words. POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE. 412. The positive words, sane, temperate, piety, useful, vV proper, are expressed by the characters q^_/ [~^ Mt\ The negatives are written v *ix insane, [*~^ intemperate, ~~Y impiety, \^o useless, '~ N \ improper. In most eases, as here, the negative is expressed by a prefix or affix attached to the positive word -form. To this rule some ex- ceptions are made in favor of positives which begin with /, r, m or n, negatives of which are formed by prefixing il t ir, im and un, as in legal, illegal, regular, irregular, moral, immoral, necessary, unnecessary. See Ls 14 and 15. It will be observed that while a distinct syllable is prefixed in each case, the consonant elements are not increased; for example, immoral is simply moral with the short t sounded before it. There are three different methods of distinguishing between positives and negatives of this class of words: 413. 1. By writing the negative in the first position, and the positive in the second, as in mortal, immortal, L 14. Illustrative words: Material immaterial morality immor- ality materialism immaterialism moderate immoderate. 414. 2. By using up-strokes for the positive, and down- strokes for the negative, as in legal, illegal. Write: Legiti- mate illegitimate logical illogical repressible irrepressible resistible irresistible retrievable irretrievable. 415. 3. By reduplicating the initial consonant, as in im- movable, illiberal. L 16. 824 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 416. 4. Vowels also are sometimes employed for this purpose in phrases, as in else-than, less-lhan. L J5. 417. Write: Measurable immeasurable memorial im- memorial nerve unnerve natural unnatural refutable irrefutable reverent irreverent revocable ir-evocable ne'ghborly unneighborly. PHRASES. 418. What-do-you-mean \ve-shall-do whai-extent wh^t- I-ara what-I-desire what-I-find what-I-meant what-I-said what-shall-be what- was-necessary what- would-be-said what- would-be-the which-h as-been who-would-know why-is-it will-be-satistied will-not-be-taken will-not-get-it would- accept would-not-be-respectable would-not-be-responsible a-great-many-of-his ahead-of-you ahead-of-your all-we-wish another-advantage another-day any-more-than-I-can any- way-you-can any-way-at-all because-you-have because-we- have because-we-do because-it-can-be consider-their con- sider-your consider-the-matter consider-that-matter entire- business entire-control entire-season entire-year entirely- different entirely-in-their-hands entirely- (a)-matter entire- ly-in-their-possession for-a-long-time long-while look-into- the-matter satisfactory-way several-months-ago see-what- can-be-done shall-be-pleased several-years-ago short-period take-advantage take-this-occasion take-this-matter when- ever-it-is-convenlent. 419. EXERCISE 39. Vocalize: Beaumont Blair Colton Congreve Dryden Erasmus Hale Hazlitt Knox Martineau Pope Rousseau Seneca Shelley Taylor; (without vowels) Andrews Aris- totle Bentham Bentley Berkeley Blackstone Bolingbroke Burgess Burton Carleton Cervantes Chalmers Channing Clarendon Cobden Coleridge Cromwell Descartes Diogenes Douglas Drummond Erskine Evans Fenelon Francis Fuller Gibbon Goldsmith Harrington Herbert Hogarth Hopkins Hudson Huxley Irving Johnson Juvenal Kings- REPORTING STYLF OF SHORT-HAND. 28 ley Lambert Lessing Longfellow Macaulay Mackenzie Mason Meredith Miller Morgan Nelson Parker Pascal Petrarch Plutai'ch Porter Robertson Robinson Rogers Ruskin Russell Sheridan Spurgeon Sterling Strickland Tennyson Turner Voltaire Warburton Warren Wesley W h i p pie Words worth . VOCALIZE: Albany Ann Arbor Augusta Austin Beloit Dayton Detroit Dover Elmira Hobokeu Houston Kala- inaxoo La Crosse Mobile Peoria Racine Salem Savannah Syracuse Toledo Troy; (without vowels) Ashland Atchison Athens Atlanta Baltimore Battle Creek Belfast Belleville Bethlehem Bowling Green Bridgeport Brooklyn Buffalo Cambridge Camden Canton Carbondale Central City Chattanooga Chillicothe Columbia Columbus Concord Council Bluffs Crawfordsville Dallas Danville Davenport Dubuque Easton East Saginaw Elgin Evanston Fall-River Fitchburg Foiul-du-Lac Fort Wayne Galesburgh Galveston Georgetown Grand Rapids Hannibal Hartford Haverhill Holyoke Hyde Park Indianapolis Jackson Jersey City Keokuk Lafayette Lancaster Lawrence Leavenworth Leuiston Lexington Little Rock Lockport Memphis Mer- iden Milwaukee Minneapolis Montgomery Muskegon Muscatine Nashville Newark New Bedford New Haven New Orleans Norwich Patterson Pawtucket Petersburgh Philadelphia Pittsburg Portsmouth Poughkeepsie Provi- dence Quincy Richmond Rochester Rock Island Sacra- mento Salt Lake City San Antonio Scranton Shenandoah Springfield St. Joseph St. Louis St. Paul Terre Haute Trenton Utica Vicksburg Waltham Washington Wil- mington Worcester. (2113:302:30.) 4-20. NEW- YORK, Dec. 5th, 1886. Mu. CHAS. C. FRENCH, Dear-Sir: With cordial acknowledgments for-past favors, the-undersigned respectfully solicits contributions of-private- ly received marine and-commercial news. Our members, representing as they-do most of-the ocean commerce of-the country, are daily receiving from-their cor- 826 REPORTING STYLE OF SnORT-HAXD. respondents a-large mass of advanced marine information arrivals, sailings, charters, clearances, disasters, vessels in port, etc. The Maritime Exchange, as the-chief bureau of-marine news in-the United-States, is naturally the-central point where-such early intelligence should-be collected and-clu^-i- fied. Its daily accumulation there will-not only benefit the- members at large, but strengthen the-resources of-the a--<>- ciation, in- which each member is interested. Its subsequent publication will, moreover, prove a-boon to-the families of- the crews. Blanks to facilitate reports will-be gladly sent on applica- tion. By-order of-the board-(of)-directors. F. W. HOTJGHTON, Superintendent. (1501:451.) 421. TRANSLAifc. y "T \_ ^ V- ' ,C pointed. For reporting purposes, and advanced prac- REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 230 tice also, a writing fluid, as Arnold's or Carter's, is better than ink, which is apt to be too thick or heavy. Professor Morris' books on phrasing well merit the atten- tion of students of all systems. Stenographers who wish to know their business well, and keep abreast the times, will subscribe for two or three of the best periodicals devoted to their profession. It is suggested that students in want of material apply to the dealer, from whon this book was obtained for information and prices. PHRASES. 452. After-many-inquiries after-you-have-been after-the- matter after-the-question bad-account can-you-make dif- ferent-varieties during-the-year ever-since-you-have-been express-purpose for-another-purpose for-my-part may-their much-as-I-desire much-as-we-desire much-pleased no-hurry- about promissory-note quite -probable quite-sure quite- sure-there-are real-estate-broker remember-that-we took- possession very-certain very-certain-about-it very-good- man very-good-quality very-necessary we-have-no-objec- tions we-hope-that-you-can -we-will-name-you. 453. EXERCISE 41. DO SOME PRACTICAL WORK FOR SOME BUSINESS MAN. From "One Hundred Valuable Suggestions to Short-Hand Students." To be phrased. ~" The best kind of practice the student can have, after he has learned the principles, is that which approaches most nearly' to the kind of work he will be obliged to do in actual reporting. Business men, in fact, prefer those who" have had some practical experience, and in order to be able to satisfy them that you are not a mere beginner/" you should secure some actual practice just for the experience it will give. Go to some business man who has more (1) or less correspondence, and offer to take all his letters for awhile without wages. You can well afford to do this.' In the first place, you would be fitting yourself for the actual work in 240 REPORTING STYLE OF SlfORT-HAXD. the most thorough and practical manner possible/' If your work is satisfactory, and you ought not to expect a paying position until it is, it would be much'" easier to secure a situation, and to fill it acceptably, than you might otherwise hope to do. Another advantage that often arises (2) from such a course is in causing the man for whom you work to learn to appreciate the advantages of short-hand/ and in this way, cause a demand for your own employment, or for that of some other short-hand writer/' (215^-'>-30 1:30.) LESSON XLII. RULES FOR PHRASING. 454. KEY. 1. (Simple phrases.) Shall-have have-been saves-time good-men many-good-men men-of-action some- men-of-nerve begin-immediately. 2. (Simple sentence.) The-old-gentleman, who-was-president (of-the) First-Nation- al-Bank, immediately gave-the-money to-the manager (of -the) Pennsylvania-Railroad-Company, who-was-standing in-tlie bank-parlor at-the-time. 8. (Omitted consonants.) Most- likv'ly fishing-tackle general-breakdown Trans-continental* Railway-Co. 4. (Omitted words.) Promise-to-pay by-the- law-ol-the-survival-of-the-fittest day-of-the-month change- of-the-weather what-is-your-business where-do-you-reside. 5. (Lengthened outlines.) They-still men's-strength short- stop served-his-time per-minute serve-their-purpose jury- man gentlemen-of-the-jury per-annum. 6. (Lengthened phrases.) Shall-not-have some-one-that was-not-keeping for-there-came may-there-be their-own-safety may-it-be. 7 (Variable letters; Coin and Con.) This-will-make shall- merely store-door do-you-wish such-as-will-not you-should- not-condemn you-will-contrive they-may-well-complain. 8. (Position words.) For-no-time in-every-part the-samc- raan I-shall-sue-him many-things love-him. 9. (Position j words vocalized.) In-any-even t in-no-event it-is-for-me REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. S41 it-is-my-own-copy rather-than-hope for-some-men. 10. (Con- tracted phrases.) In-reply-to takes-us will-there-be at-first it-\\ ill-not at-all which-are in-regard-to. PHRASES. 11. Trust-that-you-will venture-to-say we-may- have we-tbink-there-is we-will-order day-of- the- week rnust- at-knowledge. 12. Must-also must-always obliged-to-give subject-to-my-order two-or-three-times we-have-no-knowl- edge-of-the-matter. 13. Able-to-collect able-to-realize ac- cording-to-the-letter according-to-the-instruction any-kind- of-business at-the-same-rate. 14. We-want-to-know cer- tain-class-of -goods I-am-a\vare-of-the-fact just-received- your-letter-of-recommendation as-per-my-order. 15. Ac- cording-to-agreerueut according-to-his-agreement accord- ing-to-contract receive-their-letter by-some-other-nrm within-a-day-or-so. 455. The student has already, by the faculty of imitation, learned in a general way how to connect words together into phrases. Specific rules are needed, however, as a safe guide to good practice. The learner, who is now advanced, will apprehend the meaning, and understand the application of such rules. But it cannot be said that the student has mas- tered this or any other subject until the underlying principle has been grasped. This, in an incidental way, we shall aim to state. An elaborate treatise will not, of course, be looked for within the limits of a single lesson. Phrasing is a science of itself. It has been characterized as an "Art within an art." It bears a similar relation to the broad subject of Short-hand, that Algebra does to the general subject of Mathematics, for instance, or that State government in our country sustains to the National. .To short-hand it is the linishing touch, a kind of internal perfection. By it speed is increased, and legibility added to. That there is a gain in joining words to some extent is ad- mitted on all sides. It is true, however, that there exists a diversity of opinion amongst the best writers and teachers touching the extent to which phrase-writing can profitably be carried. The objectors point to the example of many old 243 REPORT 7.\O STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. stenographers, experience-i and successful in their profes- sion, who phrase but little. These facts carry a certain force; they are valuable evidence of at least one of the possi- bilities of the art, showing what can be done with simple short-hand, unstrenglhcned by the phrase. When short-hand was learned by our earlier reporters, phrasing was a new thing, and its correct use unknown. Most of the successful stenographers of to-day employ phrasing habl.^ally, and connect words according to certain well settled rutes. The statement needs no proof that words can be phrased in less time than they can be written separately. Every pen-lifting costs nearly half a second, or the loss of a word. The obvious advantage of joining is proved by the universal custom of connecting together all letters of each word when writing long-hand. Copy this sentence, writing each letter separately: " T-h-i-s i-s a s-l-o-w w-a-y o-f w-r-i-t-i-n-g " Why, then, ought not an entire discourse to be reported without a single break, or lifting of the pen? As a means of getting hold of our subject, we will assume that all words are to bz joined together when short-hand notes are taken. The exceptions to this broad rule we sum up as follows: 436. 1. SENTENCES. Phrasing is designed partly as an aid to legibility, which is a matter of no less importance than speed itself. But joining words together would be a draw- back to legibility, unless some kind of correspondence be- tween the manner of phrasing and the structure of language were expressed by the short-hand notes themselves. To illustrate, at the close of a sentence the speaker comes to a full stop. He has expressed a complete thought. There is here, as there should be, a corresponding break in the phrase. In short-hand the words of two separate sentences should never be written connectedly. Hence it would be improper to express the two sentences, "They-make-money.-They-love-it," by the connected phrase, (s-^^-\_* .* Likewise the expression, Jl "He-is-done.-He-may-go," is wrong. 944 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 457. SUBJECT AND PRFDICATE. It is well established that the subject of a sentence and its verb should not be joined. The subject and its modifiers form a complete part, or member of the sentence, as do also the verb and its modi- fiers. For this reason they should be kept separate. The two words, for example, composing the sentence, "Dogs bark," should under no circumstances be connected. A pro- noun, on the contrary, is always joined to its verb, as I-do, they-make, we-have. Ambiguity would result not infrequent- ly from the practice of joining nouns and their verbs, as, for example, the character, I clocks-tick, could also be read, clock-stick. 458. COMPOUND SUBJECT. In the sentence "Corn, beans and potatoes are raised in abundance," the three words corn, beans and potatoes, of which the subject is composed, should not be connected. The same rule applies to the compound pre- dicate, as in the sentence," The patriot soldier fought, bled, and died for his country," the verbs fought, bled, and died, are written separately. 459. RELATED WORDS. Take the sentence "Having raised another army, the general hastened to relieve. the city"; here the words "army the general", should not be connected, for the important reason that there is no gramatical relation be- tween army and t he. For the same reason, chairs, baskets, and knives, should not be phrased in the sentence, "He keeps chairs, baskets, and knives for sale." The rule is that two or more words, not sustaining some relation of government or modification, should not be connected together. 460. LENGTH.' Experience shows that writing long phrases occasions loss instead of gain in time. The reason is that when the pen is applied to the paper the hand, wrist and forearm are so fixed, or stationed, that it is very inconven- ient to move the pen along more than one or two inches of space without re-stationing the hand and arm. Indeed, for most persons it is inconvenient to write a character much more than half an inch in length. An attempt to copy the BEPORTiyG STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 245 following joined letters without pausing, will serve more J forcibly to impress this truth: veuience would suggest that this combination be broken in- to three equal parts, of which one would be ^_^ tf^^ \__p Most persons have experienced this inconvience when writ- ing lengthy words in long-hand. Long phrases are a pos- itive drawback. The difficulty in executing them may be illustrated by the phrase ~" v ~' ^ ^ ^ ^_^^_^ v^x^ He-kept- coming-and-going-and-going-and-coming-many -many-years. Young reporters sometimes go to the absurd extreme of writing as many words in a single phrase as can be made hang together. An illustration is found in the following scn- tance of thirty-nine words, which it is possible to write connectedly: I-think-it-is-quite-likely-that-we-will-leave-for- America - before - very - many - more-months-and-you-will-then- havc-no-difficulty-whatever-in-getting-all - the - knowledge you - may-want-in-regard-to-that-wonderful-land. 461. ANGULARITY. Inconvenient joinings, also those pro- ducing obtuse or insufficient angles, are not permissible. On this account the following expressions cannot be phrased: Do-not tell, pay up, than they, one people, construction train, great expense, do-not go, capital gossip, upon-his honor, find it, have-not found. 462. CONSONANT POSITION. To some extent phrasing is limited by the requirements of consonant position. Illustra- tior : ^ __ Have-no-ttme should be phrased always while ^_ l^-x Have any-time sometimes cannot be; in-every-part, } in-every particular; lrv^~^ the-same- ** man, 5~N the-same men; ^ I-shall-sue-him, 246 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. s P I-shall see-him; ^-\_^ many things, ^~^_xs^p many- languages. The point here is that the phrase must some- times be broken in order that first and third position worus may be in their place, thus relieving the notes from ambi- guity. Whether a given word may, for the sake of a phi be written out of position, is a question purely of context and circumstances. The reporter who pays attention to what he is writing, can tell in a moment whether legibility demands the phrase to be broken on account of a position word. He must exercise common sense and judgment. Since phra.ses are broken on account of first and third position words, it is for that very reason never necessary to do so on account of any second position word. All connected words are pre- sumed to belong on the line, unless the requirements of sense plainly indicate otherwise. In L 8 it would, under some circumstances, become necessary to break the connection, if in the first phrase any occurred in the place of no, or partic- ular in the place of part; man in place of men; see in place of sue; language in place of things; or me in place of him. 463. UNUSUAL WORDS. Words not frequently used are written disconnectedly. For example, the expressions, mucilage bottle, cylindrical column, habitual drunkard, mtrry girls, should not be phrased. A very few common short words, such as pronouns, prepositions, and conjunctions, may be attached to unusual words, as in the-middling, the-indubit- able, or-California, was-revised. ADVANTAGES. 464. SPEED. The gain in speed, Resulting from the dimin- ished number of pen-liftings, is obvious. Write the phnt>; "save-time" rapidly for thirty seconds; then write the two words separately as often as you can in the same length of time. The experiment will show the phrase written six or eight more times in the first trial, which is equivalent to a gain of twenty-five or thirty words in one minute. 465. LEGIBILITY. Since the grammatical structure of the REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 247 sentence is shown in large part by the phraseological group- ing of the words, ease in reading the notes is thereby in- creased to no small extent. Referring to L 2, the first three words, the-old-gentleman, are phrased, because the and old are both modifiers of gentleman. All the words of the clause, who-was-president of-the First- National-Bank, would natur- ally be connected together, but it is broken into two on ac- count of length, and broken in such a manner that of-lhe is expressed by the juxtaposition of the two phrases. On account of angle immediately cannot be joined to gave. Gave-the-money is a good phrase, and it is customary, where convenient, to connect a transitive verb and its object. The propriety of joining words and their modifiers is illustrated by the phrases good-men, men-of-aclion, etc., L 1. Phrasing enables the reader to see at a glance which words are mutually dependent, and which are not. 466. ACCURACY. Phrasing makes time by saving time. By means of it the writer gains more leisure in which to form the characters with greater precision and skill, thus adding both to the beauty and legibility of his notes. 167. ABBREVIATION. In phrasing, many single letters and even words are omitted. See most-likely, promise-to-pay, etc., Ls 3 and 4. These phrases are perfectly legible; but it is evident that this legibility would be impaired by such abbreviation, if the words composing such phrases were writ- ten disconnectedly. A phrase may be abbreviated safely, for the same reason that a long word, containing a good number of consonants, may be abbreviated; in each case an abundance of material remains to enable the reader to get at the meaning easily. This is an important point; it is giving to short-hand, by means of phrasing, the advantage of the universal habit, in coloqual discourse, of clipping some words and merging others, when they occur in ex- pressions that are worn and familiar. Ls 11-15. 468. COMPACTNESS. The fact that in the phrase the words are drawn into the briefest compass, renders it possible for the eye to take them all in at a glance; notes can then be I C4S R EPOR TING STYLE OF SHOE T-ffA .V7). read more quickly than when strung out over two or three times the space. Illustrations: We-have-long-been: V*_ (^*~ / ^ better, \J \ ; that-it-m:iy-not-U>- as- well-as: | X _ N \ f~ or, 469. EXPEDIENTS. Many v-ord-fcrms are lengthened, in order that they may be joined m cert^n phrases, as t/iey-xtill, men's-strength. L 5. Certain phrase-signs, also, are written by longer forms, in order to render it practicable for more words to be joined, as in shall-not-have, some-one-that, etc. L 6. In these phrases the n-hook cannot be used for not, one, or own; nor, on account of angularity, can the lengthen- ing or halving principles be used \nfor-there-came, may-it-be, etc. The variable letters, I, r, sh, are struck in either direc- tion in phrases, as angularity may require, as in this-will- make, do-you-wish. L 7. Words beginning with com and con, except a few very frequent ones, are disjoined from the one just preceding, as in you-should-not condemn. L 7. Position words are sometimes vocalized when occurring in phrases. This requires less time than breaking the phi UM\ (See L 9.) The principle of contracting outlines by menus of hooks, circles, loops, lengthening, halving, etc., is also employed to some extent in writing such phrases as in-rcply- to, will-there-be, it-will-not. L 10. 470. RULES. 1. Do not construct phrases inconveniently long, or that extend more than two spaces below the line. 2. Avoid joinings that are unangular; also difficult ones, * r as be-not-elected, correctly written (. . A difficult join- ing requires more time than breaking the phrase. Adverbs ending in ly are rarely joined to following words. 3. Words beginning with com and con are rarely attached REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. to preceding words. The fact of separation indicates the prefix, which for this reason need not be written. 4. A word may occasionally be written by a longer out- line, if this is necessary to render it phraseable* See L 5. 5. Words only that are comparatively common should be joined together. Unusual words are written disconnectedly. 6. Never join two words that are separated by a mark of punctuation, nor any set of words not mutually inter-de- pendent, or grammatically related. 7. As far as practicable connect together a pronoun and its verb; a modifying word or phrase, and the word modified; prepositions and the words they govern; verbs and their objects; conjunctions and the clauses they introduce. 8. The artistic writer, whose characters are small and well formed, may adopt more lengthy phrases than writers lacking these qualifications. 9. An assemblage of words making a suitable phrase should invariably be written together; not phrased at one time, and separated at another. 10. The first word of a phrase, called the leader, is usually given its proper position; but exceptions are sometimes made when it is important that the second word hold its own place, as in -~ his-own, .!!!!1._ give-out. 11. One, then and own, may be expressed by the n-hook whenever preceded by a word of common occurrence to which such hook may be joined conveniently, as will-have-one, bet- ter-then, my-own. 12. Of may be expressed by the f-hook in phrases where the tick of does not join conveniently, as in T city -of -Bos- ton. in P cil J 13. As a rule or and but are not phrased, but may be joined when there is no possibility of conflict with a or and. His is not commonly joined at the beginning of a phrase, as his business, written disconnectedly. 14. It is indispensable tnat tne student form the habit of 250 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND writing the words connectedly, always within the limits above specified. This habit can never come from mere r< 'n- ever-you-are-ready will-be-charged will-be-collected will- be-marked will-be-expressed will-you-please-acknowledge- receipt your-loss your-risk your-order your-humble-servant. 482. EXERCISE 44. OUR HOME ON-THE HILLSIDE, DANSVILLE, LIVINGSTON Co., NEW- YORK, March 1, 1884. ISAAC BENNETT, ESQ./ Carrollton, 111. My -Dear- Sir: Our mutual-friend, Mr. -Peters, who-is at- present in-the employ of Our" Home on-the Hillside, as one of-its reporting secretaries, has handed me your-letter of Feb. 20/ // wherein you express a-desire to-have my testimony in-respect-to stenographic writing. It gives me great pleas- ure (1) to say to-you, that for twenty-six years I-have-had young-men-and-women in-my-employment' as stenograph- Plate 44- L, . C ' V I <5-N r .4 too DeBemales, New York City. ' 19 C "^ .) (To be phrased.) 488. NEW YORK, July llth, 1886. W. W. GRIFFITH, ESQ., Memphis, Tenn. Dear Sir: We regret 7 exceedingly the non-delivery of your esteemed order, and the inconvenience and disappoint- ment occasioned you thereby. We can assure you, 77 how- ever, that we are in no way responsible for the delay; but that, on the contrary, we have used 777 eve v y effort to secure the prompt execution and despatch of the .rder. ''SPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 259 It happens, unfortunately for us, that just at (1) tL. ; pi'esent moment the manufacturers are overwhelmed with business; and, in a juncture such as this, there is no help' for it but to wait patiently the execution in due course of the orders sent. With the hope, however/' of prevailing on the manufac- turer in this particular instance to make a little extra exer- tion, we have written him, by this'" evening's mail, a most urgent letter; and we feel almost certain that if our request can be complied with (2) it most certainly will be. As soon as we receive an answer we will write or telegraph to you such' positive information as may prevent further disap- pointment. We must apologize for not having written to you previously; but, the" truth is, we ourselves were ex- pecting every day to hear some tidings of the order which we might send"' you. Regretting the trouble and annoyance to which you have been put, we are, Yours faithfully, J. L. KING & Co. (3) (23431:30.) LESSON XLV. SPEECH REPORTING. 484. A verbatim report of a rapid public speaker is the greatest achievement of the stenographic art. There are, however, but comparatively few speeches of which reports are wanted; and it is a fortunate fact that the best orators, whose speeches are the most frequently published, are the easiest, also, to report. But it is very rare that a speech appears well in print, in the precise language in which it was delivered. A certain amount of tautology and repetition add to the force of a spoken address, which in a printed re- port must be discarded. Many phrases, and even whole sentences, may oftentimes be profitably omitted; and the rhetoric of an extemporaneous speech can generally be im- proved. These matters lie clearly within the scope of the stenographer's duty; but the best plan is always, when pos- 260 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD sible, to submit to the speaker himself an exact copy, written on paper with a broad margin, in order that he may amend and remodel as he sees fit. 485. KEY. 1. As-it-is-the-characteristic of great wits to say- much in few words, so-it-is of-small wits to talk much and say nothing. 2. It-is-when you-come close to-a-man in conversation that-you discover what-his real abilities, are 8. Speech-making is-a knack. 4. Men are born with two eyes, but-with-one tongue, in-order-that-they should see twice as-much-as they-say. Matt. 5: 3-13. Translate without referring to key. 486. The student will find the following suggestions of value, whether he intends making a business of this branch of reporting or not: Fully prepare yourself before the speech begins. Obtain a seat, one at a desk if possible, within easy hearing of the speaker. Have yourself amply provided with suitable writ- ing material. Use a pen, if you are accustomed to one; otherwise, have a number of sharpened pencils at hand. No matter what the purpose of your report may be, make it a point, as far as you are able, to take every word that is uttered. If the entire speech is not wanted, you can prepare an intelligent synopsis from your full short-hand notes; but an abridgement made in short-hand while the speech is being delivered, is by no means so satisfactory. Beginners are sometimes obliged, however, before they can follow a rapid speaker, to make as full a synopsis as they are able, recording the substance only of what is said. And it is commonly the case, indeed, that only partial reports of very rapid speakers are wanted. A complete report of a speech requires that many things be inserted, which, verbally, are not a part of the address itself, things acted rather than said. The manner and ap- pearance of the speaker should be described; also, the char- acter of the audience, and the demonstrations of approval, or otherwise, with which the speaker's utterances are re- ceived. $late 43* SENTENCES. m/ -V> K-^-\ - c ^ "), L W X ^-v ? ----- 1. / b JL -v- ^^> ^ > "" *\ _^L TRANSLATE. Matt. chap. 5. us) x r ) p. \ ) v, 862 SfPOSTTJfO STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. PHRASES. 487. FUi Jier-consideration good-as-ever great-many- times I-suppose-you-can I-suppose-there-will-be 1-takc- great-pleasure knowledge-of-the-subject little-as-possible little-less local-affairs local-interest paper-money per-day per-dozen pcr-week personal-affairs personal-expenses per- sonal-knowledge personal-property relating-to-the-subject we- want-to-find. EXERCISE 45. 488. THE-PRESEXT AGE. CHANNING. 1. The remarks now-made on literature might be extended to-the tine arts. 2. In-these we see, too, the-tendency to universality/ It-is-said, that-the-spirit of-the great artists has died out; but-the taste for-their works is spreading. 8. By-the" improvements of engraving, and-the invention of casts, the-genius of-the great masters is going abroad. 4. Their conceptions are no longer pent"' up in galleries open to but few, but meet us in-our homes, and are-the household pleasures of millions. 5. Works designed for- the (1) halls and eyes of emperors, popes, and-nobles, find their-way, in no poor representations, in humble dwellings, and sometimes give-a consciousness' of kindred powers to- the child of poverty. . The-art of drawing, which lies at- the foundation of-most of-the tine arts/' and-is the-best education of-the eye for nature, is becoming a-branch of common education, and in-some countries is taught"' in schools to-which all classes are admitted. 7. I-am reminded by-this remark of-the-most striking feature of-our times, as (2) showing its tendency to-universality, and-that-is-thr unparalleled and-constantly accelerated diffusion of educa- tion. This greatest of arts, as yet little' understood, is making sure progress, because its principles are more-and- more sought in-the-common nature of man; and-the great truth" is spreading, that-every-man has-a right to-its aid. 8. Accordingly education is becoming the-work of nations. 9. Even in-the despotic"' governments of Europe schools REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 263 are open for-every child without distinction ;and-noo only the elements of reading and writing, but music and-dra\ving (3) are taught, and-a foundation is laid for future progress in history, geography, and-physical science. 10. The-greatest minds are at work on popular' education. 11. The-revenues of states are applied most liberally, not to-the universities for-the few, but to-the common-schools. 12. Undoubtedly mue'ii" remains to-be-done; especially a-new rank in society is-to-be given to-the teacher; but even in-this-respect'" a- revolution has commenced, and-we-are beginning to-look on-the guides of-the young as-the chief benefactors of-man- kind. (4) (36943.) LESSON XL VI. CONVENTION REPORTING. 489. Stenographers are employed to report the proceed- ings of various deliberative assemblies, as legislatures, con- stitutional, and the more important political conventions, and professional and trades-men's associations. These re- ports are commonly furnished to newspapers, and also frequently published in book form. The purposes for which they are made, and the degrees of fullness required are so various, that no comprehensive rules can be laid down suffi- cient to govern the reporter in every case. The following suggestions, however, will be found of value: 490. The stenographer should, if possible, be seated near, or at the same tab.e with the official secretary, in order that, as the business progresses, he may learn the names of speak- ers, and those taking part in the discussions. It is the best plan always to take as full notes as possible although an abridged report only may be wanted, since the work of condensing can better be performed when the tran- scribing is being done, than when the proceedings are in course. 864 REPORTING 8TYLF OF SHORT-HAXD. It is commonly the reporter's duty to take down all mo- tions and resolutions, except those in writing; also, amend- ments thereto, and remarks and decisions thereupon. Essays, and other papers which are read to the association, are filed with the secretary, and need not be taken down in short-hand; but the discussion of any question to which these may give rise, should be noted by the reporter. The speaker's name, when announced by the chairman, should be written in long-hand at the left margin of the paper, and his remarks recorded just below. The official stenographer of the convention should make a record of everything that transpires. Much revision, and the judgment of an editor, are needed in preparing such verbatim reports for publication. This is usually done by the secretary, or a special committee. Short-hand writers experienced in this branch of the profession, are often em- ployed both to make and revise, or edit, such reports. The successful reporter of public meetings is wide-awake and observing; on the alert constantly not only to hear what is said, but to know what is meant by the speaker. The stenographer who does not know the meaning of what he writes cannot be relied upon to make a correct transcript. EXERCISE 46. 491. PROCEEDINGS THIRD ANNUAL MEETING OF THE IOWA STATE PHARMACEUTICAL ASSOCIATION, HELD IN DES MOINES, FEBRUARY 14-15, 1882/ FIRST DAT. WEDNESDAY AFTERNOON SESSION. The-meeting was called to order at 10 o'clock. President Hogin in-the chair. The-minutes of-the last session were read/' corrected, and-approved. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 265 The-President: I-will-now call for- the report of-the Com- mittee on Legislation. The-report was read by-the Chairman, '" Mr. Bush, and- the paper passed to-the Secretary. On motion of Mr. Wallace, the-Feport of-the Committee on Legislation was adopted. (1) The-President: Dr. Treat, have-you anything further to- report on Pharmacy and Queries? Dr. Treat: Yes-sir; a-paper by' Mr. W. H. Hardy, of- Clinton. The-Secretary: Mr. -Chairman, I-would-like to say first, that our Treasurer has-a-letter from Mr. Hardy/' expressing regrets for-his inability to-be at-the meeting. The-President: We-will-now listen to-the reading of-the paper'" by Mr. W. H. Hardy, of-Clinton. The-paper is read to-the Association by Dr. Treat. The-President: Now you have heard-the (2) reading of- the paper by Mr. -Hardy, of-Clinton. What-is-the pleasure of-the house as-to-the disposal of -it?' Dr. Treat: I-move-you, Mr. -Chairman, that-the communi- cation be-received. The-President: You-mean by-that, that- it shall-be printed" in-the proceedings? Dr. Treat: Yes-sir. The-motion was-carried and-the thanks of-the Association tendered the-writer. Mr. Schafer:"' I-will-now present the-report of-the com- mittee appointed to consider the-President's address. Vice-President Townsend assumes the-chair. The committee (3) referred to report as follows: " To-the President and-members of-the Iowa State Pharmaceutical Association: Your committee appointed to consider the- address of-our 7 retiring President, ask to-present the-follow- ing report: We-do most heartily concur in-the leading suggestions. We would, however, call your special" attention to-the fol- lowing recommendations: 6fl REPORTING STYLE OF SITORT-ffAXD. 1. That every registered Pharmacist look well to all im- I positions from unprincipled persons, in-obtaining liquors for I improper use'" under all manner of representations. 2. That- we heartily endorse the aiding and sustaining the- Commissioners of Pharmacy in-their duties to-the full (4) extent of-the law. 8. The-subject of revising the-By-Laws had our attention, but owing to-the necessities of-the-case, amendments have 7 already been adopted, which fully cover this point. 4. We-most heartily and-cheerfully endoi'se the sugges- tion, that-the Association become incorporated under-the" laws of-the State. A-motion to adopt the-report of-the com- mittee prevailed. Mr. -Crawford: Mr. -Chairman; I-move-you that-the"' Committee on Legislation, as expressing the-sense of-this Association, be instructed to procure an-amendment to-the- present law, making it a (5) penalty not-exceeding $200 for- a-person conducting a-pharmacy without registration, by having that-matter so that-it-will properly' come before-the Grand-Jury, and-that-the Court may act at discretion, and- uiake-a fine not-exceeding this amount. There-are" c-oin- | inanities where-the prohibitory liquor law of Iowa is prac- j tically a-dead-letter. No Grand-Jury can-be impaneled to- take proper cognizance 7 " of-the law. The law maker makes the law, not-only to rule subjects, but also to rule the law makers. Now I-think-that, (6) in- this-matter, we stand between-the law maker and-the law breaker. In-this-respect we-are handling, unfortunately, patent medicines/ one of-the giant evils of-the day. That- there is-a-demand for-them, no-one questions. This-demand comes as well" f rom-the law maker as-it does f rom-the law breaker. While one man claims to call for-it within-the limits of-the'" law, there-is-a question at-last about what there-is-a,call for. Now-then, we-are-not only standing be- tween law makers (7) and law breakers, but-we stand be- tween-the patent medicine man and-the consumer, between- the physician and-the patient. It-seems-to-me' our position REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 267 is-a very peculiar one. For-instance, some nostrum is placed upon-the market and-it-is-so advertised" that-there-is-a de- mand for-it, aud-we, as retail dealers, purchase some and-sell it to-our customers who demand it. It-is-a"' spurious article. Who gets the blame? I-think those-who-are doing business on-honest principles and-living up to-the law, will (8) go forward and raise the standard so high that-every-one will- be ashamed to engage in-that business. The-President: The-motion' now is-that-the Committee on Legislation procure a-pharmacy law making-the violator liable to-a penalty not-exceeding $200." Mr. Parish: Did-you say that-it-should-be indictable? Mr. -Crawford: Yes-sir. I said that-it-should-be a misde- meanor/'''' and-that-the penalty should-be-that amount. A-Member: I-think-there ought-to-be a-way of getting out-of-it without-making (9) it a-Grand-Jury affair. I-think- Jt-is-an offense that-ought-to-be punishable before-a justice- of-the-peace/ Mr. Parish: I-don't-think, Mr. -Chairman, that-you-can find-a town in Iowa, where there-is-a druggist, but who-has- a delicacy" about filing a complaint against-a competitor. But if-you-make it a-Grand-Jury offense, they-will be obliged to-take action 7 " in-these-matters. You-may take-it in-any town. There-is one in-our town who-is-not-a pharmacist, not eligible by-reason-of (10) age, and-he-is violating the- law, and-there ought-to-be somebody whose duty it-was to- take action in-these-matters/ Mr. Ellis: Let-us-take-a view of-our position as druggists, the-position in-which we-are held up before-the public," so fur-as we-are individually concerned. It-ought-to-be our object personally to abide by-the laws, whatever these laws may-be."' (101010:458.) 492. TRANSLATE. ~7 > ^ xi b ( 5_^ L/ c / | -<% 968 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 13 ** \ , c ^ u -7 493. PHRASES. v^ v -^ *i.< REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 269 LESSON XL VII. LAW REPORTING. 494. Law Reporting, or the business of recording the proceedings had on the trial of causes, is one of the most im- portant branches of the stenographic profession. In this day, all important cases are reported in short-hand/ and, in- deed, of so great advantage is this art found to be in the ad- ministration of justice, that in many states the appointment of skilled stenographers is authorized by law. In the most perfect methods of administering justice that have been devised, it has been required that some kind of record of the evidence be preserved, and the fuller this is the better. Stenography has revolutionized the methods of proceeding in the courts ; for by its speed much time is saved, and de- lays, which, during a trial, are prejudicial to justice, are more easily prevented, and the occasion lor expensive re- trials oftentimes precluded. In no business or profession is stenography more welcome than in law, where so much depends on a record being kept of the precise words made use of. The Law Reporter must possess various qualifications in- order to a competent discharge of the duties of his calling. He should be able to write at least one hundred and seventy- five words a minute, and read his notes fluently. In addi- tion, also, to a thorough English education, good memory, and quickness of perception, he should have a familiar ac- quaintance with the various forms and methods of proceed- ing in Courts. The greater his knowledge of law, especially that of evidence, the better. No student should neglect the main features of this branch of the profession. Especially the forms of such reports should be learned, since amanuen- ses, and all short-hand writers in fact, are frequently desired to make reports of depositions, referred cases, and the testi- mony received at preliminary hearings. 1J>5. The Caption of a law-stenographer's report should show the title, number, and nature of the cause, the Court Z7P ^EPORTINQ STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. where pending, the name of the judge, referee, commission- er, or other tribunal by whom the same is heard ; the term of court, building, town, county, and state where the trial is had ; the name of counsel appearing on either side ; the name and address of the stenographer employed. This should occupy the first page and be drawn up in the follow- ing manner : CAPTION. JAMES MORGAN, et al. \ APPEARANCES: NINDE & ELLISON, I No 781) Attorneys for Plaintiffs. OSCAR A. SIMONS " R. S. TAYLOR and a'jd COOMBS. MOKRIS & BELL, JOHN H. BASS. j Attorneys for Defendants. EJECTMENT. Pending in the U. S. Circuit Court for the Northern District of Indiana, June Term, A. D. 1881. At the Federal Court room, Fort Wayne, before His Honor, Judge Walter Q. Gresham, and a jury. ELDON MORAN, Official Stenographer. 496. The report proper begins on the second page, the heading of which should show for what party litigant the testimony is taken, the hour, the day of the week and month, and the year, when the trial was begun. Names of witnesses should be written in long-hand. The record should also show what attorney conducted the examination. The main body of a law-report consists in the record of question and answer, or what is said by the lawyer in elicit- ing testimony, and by the witness in reply thereto. That which is spoken by the lawyer is for convenience denomi- nated question, and the reply of the witness, answer, al- though the reverse is sometimes in fact true, as may be illus- trated by the following colloquy between lawyer and wit- ness : Ques. (lawyer) Where were you living at the time? Ans. (witness) When do you mean? REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 871 Ques. (lawyer) I mean at the time the accident happened. 497. Paper about five inches broad is the most convenient for law-reports. The question begins at the left margin and extends across the page. The answer should begin, and be entirely written, in such a manner as that no part of it shall be nearer than one and one-half inches of the left margin. Answers, when brief, may be written on the same line with the question, provided a space of at least one inch is allowed to intervene. The proper heading, and disposition of question and an- swer, is illustrated by the exercise for translation. PHRASES. 498. About-how-many about-what-time all-contracts an- nual-report enter-into-an-agreement enter-into-a-contract enter-into-possession further-consideration give-evidence g'ive-possession Grand-Jury into-court law-reports about- how-long-was-it by-the-evidence court-of-claims not-to-my- recollection offers-in-evidence state-when-it-was state-how- many take-into-consideration I-do-not-know I-know-noth- ing-about it-is-only in-its-exercise in-all-such-cases. 4C9. EXERCISE 47. WILSON H. SWALES, Guardian, ^ APPEARANCES: p g I HOLMAN & McMULLEN, THE WHITE-WATER RAILROAD f N " 146 ' BELL & BA^lSoaT COMPANY. J Atty'sfor Deft.' DAMAGES. Tried at Lawrenceburg, Indiana, at the May Term, A. D. 1881, of the Dearborn County Circuit Court, before" his Honor, Judge Hayes, and a jury. Charles Ash by, sworn on the part of Plaintiff. Examined by Mr. McMullen. Q. Where-do-you-residc *'.'" A. In Harrison Township, Dearborn Co., Ind. Q. Do-you know where Longnecker station is? A. Yes-sir. 272 REPORTING STYLE OF SffORT-HAXD. Q. Tell-the-Jury where you-live in-reference-to the-sta- tion. (1) A. I-live on-the pike about one-quarter of-a mile from- the-station. Right about here, (referring to-the map, ex- hibit "B")/ Q. How far is-it from where you-live straight across to- the railroad? A. About forty rods. Q. Do-you-remember when-this accident happened ?" A x I-believe it-was-the 9th of December, 1879, between five and six o'clock, to-the-best of-rny-knowledgf/" Q. You-may-state-whether it-was light or dark. A. It-was on-the darkish order. It-was-a sort of cloudj evening. (2) Q. How far is-that from whe r e-the railroad crosses into Franklin County? A. About two-miles. Q. Where were-you on-the evening that-this-accident happened? 7 A. At my house, standing out on-the porch. Q. What-did-you first hear, not what-was-said to-you ; first state-whether-or-not" you heard any collision or noise? A. I heard the collision, that-is what drew my-attention. Q. State to-the Jury whether-or-not at-this-time'" you saw-the passenger-train. A. I-did. Q. Where-was-the passenger-train when you saw it? A. It-was coming along-down here by-the dam'. (3) Q. Where-did the-work or wild train whistle if-at-all? A. Right here at-the graveyard just gave one bla.-t . Q. You-rnay-state-whether / that work-train gav- another signal from-that-time till-you heard the-collision down ly- the crossing. A. Yes-sir, that-is-all I heard" till the-collision. Q. Now how near was this train to-the passenger-train when-the passenger moved away from-the-station? REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 273 A. Well, I-cannot answe' '" that because I-cannot see-the station from my house. Q. Was-there any-time when you-could see both trains at-once? (4) A. Yes-sir, when-the passenger-train was here in front of-the graveyard, (referring to-the map), the wild-train was coming around the-dam/ Q. Tell-the-Jury about-how far apart these trains were at-that-time. A. Considerably over a-mile. Q. That-is, when-the passenger-train" was at-the grave- yard? A. Yes-sir. Q. How far down toward-the-station could -you see-the passenger-train from-your-house ?"' A. To-right above the target at-the upper end of-the switch. Q. How far above the-railroad is-this ground where-your- house is located? (5) A. Forty-five feet I should judge. Q. How-long was-it f rom-the-time you heard the whistle till-you heard-the collision ?' A. I-didn't pay any-attention, but it-was a-very short- time. Q. Have-you anything by-which-you-can measure the time?" A. No-sir, I-didn't pay much attention at-that-time. It- was so short a-time that I-made remarks to my wife "' Q. If-you have anything by-which-you-can fix it in-your mind without telling what-was-said and-done, (6) you-may give us your best knowledge of-it. A. It- was a-minute or somewheres about there ; perhaps it-raight-have-been that-long / or longer to-the best of-my knowledge. Q. Did-you go down to-the station after-that? A. Yes-sir, they came after me" just a-few minutes after it happened, a-very short-time. 874 SSPOETINQ STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. Q. You went down then ? A. Yes-sir. Q. Who- went with-you, if-anybody?"' A. Nobody went with-me, only the-gentleman who-came for me. Q. Were-you there when-the-train backed up again? A. No-sir. (7) Q. Had-it gone on when you arrived? A. It-was just going when I-got there. Q. Where-was Miss Hurley? A. Right at-the end of-the crib/ Q. What- was done with her? A. She-was picked up and carried to-my-house. Q. How-long did she remain at-your-house?" A. I-think two-or-three days. Q. Did-you ever measure the-distance between that crib and-the railroad? A. I-measured between-the"' end of-the shingle pile and- the rails ; I-t-hink the-distance was about one-hundred feet. Q. You did-not measure the-crib by-itself ? (8) A. No-sir, but I should judge the-crib to-be about sixtjf feet long. Q. It-is simply a-pile of shingles with-a shed over it?' A. Yes-sir, that-is-it. Q. Can-you see the-crossing f rom-your-house ? A. No-sir, I-cannot. Q. Now suppose a-party is" seated in-a two horse spring wagon, the hind wheels being past this end of-the shingle- shed, how far above the crossing /// can-the railroad target be-seen? Mr. Bell objects to-the-question, as calling for-a conclusion of-the witness rather-than for-the facts. (9) Question with- drawn. Q. I-wish you-would state just the-condition of-the lady, when-you saw her there at-the-time when' she-was taken-up to-your-house. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 275 A. She-was perfectly unconscious, did-not-know-anything for-a couple of days/' Q. What bruises, if-any, die ^a see upon her? A. She had-a wound on her arm, but I-do-not remem- ber"' now which-one ; she had also been struck on-the head. Q. Where-was-the wound dressed? A. At my house. Q. Who-was-the physician? (10) A. Dr. West, of Har- rison. Q. Was she-taken away from-your-house before she again became conscious? Mr. Bell, on-part of defendant' objects to-the-question on- the ground that-it-is leading. Objection sustained. Plain- tiff-excepts." '97810:307.) 500 BUSINESS LETTEK. TRANSLATE. Y ; x V 278 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 501. J TRANSLATE. Charles Ashby Continued. LESSON XLVHI. OBJECTIONS, RULINGS, EXCEPTIONS, EXHIBITS AND INDICES. 502. The main purpose in reporting a law-suit is that the party aggrieved may be secured in his right of appeal to a higher Court. There are many other uses, however, which these records are made to serve. A verbatim report is use- ful in various ways on re-trials, as, for instance, when im- peachments are sought ; also, to refresh the memory of counsel and witnesses, and settle disputes in regard to the testimony formerly elicited. For the same reasons they are often serviceable in collate- ral proceedings ; also, to perpetuate the testimony of wit- nesses who subsequently decease or become insane. Even during the trial, the presence of "Mr. Reporter" has grown indispensable, as shown by the fact that his notes are hourly referred to. The stenographer's notes are presumed to be correct, and cannot be changed or modified except with the consent of the judge, and agreement of interested parties. The record should contain, not only everything that is said pertain- ing to the trial, but by whom it is spoken. When questions are asked, or remarks made, by the Court, jurors, or attor- neys not conducting the examination, or by the parties them selves, the name of the speaker should appear parentheti- cally in the margin. Next in importance to the evidence itself is the ^recording of objections, which are made from time to time to the intro- duction of the same, or to any proceeding which either party may regard as illegal. The grounds 'upon which such ob- jections are based should be noted by the reporter ; and should they not be stated specifically, the counsel's argu- ment in presenting the matter to the Court should be taken down. When an objection is decided, the exception, if any, taken by the party over-ruled, should also be recorded. Ex- ceptions are also taken to the decisions of the Court in sus- taining or over-ruling various motions submitted in the course of the trial. 277 7S REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. In reporting depositions, objections are recorded, and testimony taken subject thereto, no rulings being made, or exceptions taken, at the time. A law-report should be as nearly as possible a photograph of all the proceedings had. Hence, it becomes the reporter's duty to make a minute of every transaction which has a bearing on the case. Exam- ples of such notes which are inserted parenthetically are : "Witness refuses to answer the question ;" " 12 o'clock M. Court adjourns ;" "The railing referred to by the witness is about twenty feet distant ;" "Gentleman referred to by wit- ness is Mr. Jones, attorney." In some civil and most criminal cases, a report is made of the impaneling of the jury. This should embrace the exami- nation of each juror as to his qualification to act, challenges peremptoi-y and for cause, by both prosecution and defense, rulings of the Court, and exceptions of counsel. The reporter is at liberty at all times to check witnesses who speak too rapidly or indistinctly, or while the question is being put, or objection made. 503. Written documents, as deeds, notes, contracts, mortgages, letters, depositions, etc., are frequently produced in Court, and made a part of the evidence ; and for the pur- poses of identification, and convenience in making referen- ces, the same are at the time marked by the reporter as exhibit "A", "B", etc., according to the order in which they are introduced. After the alphabet has been exhausted, the double letters "AA", "BB", etc., may be employed. The paper, besides the letter "A", should be marked with the initials of the parties to the suit ; thus, for example, in the case of Frederick vs. Wilson, the certificate of a County Auditor is offered in evidence, and marked by the reporter, "Exhibit 'A', F. vs. W." This prevents ambiguity in cases where the same document has already been marked with a different latter, as an exhibit in another case. As part of the evidence, also, knives, rings, keys, photo- graphs, or any article whatever which may be important for the Court and Jury to examine, are from time to time intro- REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 879 duced. These may be marked by attaching a written card firmly to them, The reporter should be careful to identify as an exhibit, every article or document offered by either party, whether or not the same is actually admitted in evi- dence by the Court, since rejected exhibits are necessary to complete the appellant's bill of exceptions. 504. Half the value of a law-report is lost by not having it properly indexed. In the first place, the paper used should be accuratelv paged, and each separate book or manuscript numbered in the order used. Trials vary in length from an hour to several months. Reference is frequently made, and the reporter ordered to read sections of testimony taken days and even weeks previously. This can be done only by means of a running index, which is kept making from hour to hour, just as the proceedings take place. This should give the day and date of each session of Court, the name of each witness, and the page where his testimony and cross-exami- nation begins. Agreements, admissions, stipulations, and the introduction of exhibits, should also be indexed. Long-hand transcripts are paged and indexed iu a similar manner. 505. INDEX. ) EVIDENCE , f THE WHITE-WATER RAILROAD. ) FIRST DAY, MAY 19, 1881. THURSDAY FORENOON SESSION. Impaneling of the Jury, Vol. 1, Page 1. M. B. Fox, .... Vol. 1, Page 5. AFTERNOON SESSION. Fox, continued, . . . 1-11 Chas. Ashby, . . . 1-37 Cross-examination, . . 1-13 Cross-ex., 1-42 280 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. Re-direct examination, 1-20 C. Ashby, recalled, . 1-48 Frank Jackman, . . . 1-22 Benj. Holden, . . . 1-48 Cross-ex., 1-28 SECOND DAY, May 20. FKIDAY FORENOON SESSION. B. F. Hurley 1-59 Guardianship.admitted, 2-3 Cross-ex., 1-63 Exhibit "B", Map of W. H. Swales, . . Vol. 2-3 Longnecker, admitted, 2-4 Exhibit "A", Letters of FRIDAY AFTERNOON SESSION. Cross-ex., 2-4 Dr. L. J. Collins, . . 2-28 Carrie Hurley, .... 2-15 Dr. J. P. Green, . . . 2-44 Cross-ex., . . . . 2-21 Dr. J. D. Gatch, . . 2-47 PHRASES. 506. Accept-service in-chancery it-is-also-agreed judge's- order Law-courts Law-journal legal-proceedure legal-pro- ceedings legal-representative new-trial personal-estate plaintiff-and-defendant police-court supreme-court with- out-prejudice your-honor according-(to)-your-recollection along-about-that-time according-(to)-my-recollection did- you-recognize do-you-recollect-anything-about-this if-the- court-please if-your-honor-please this-is-an-action where- did-you-go will-you-examine what-has-been. 507. EXERCISE 48. FREDERICK ) vs. [ EVIDENCE ON PART OF CONTESTEE. WILSON. ) Session at Marshalltown, Iowa, April 12, 1883. James K. Johnson, sworn/ Examined by Judge Bradley. Q. What official position if-any do-you hold? A I-am deputy clerk. REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 281 Q. Have-you examined the naturalization records of-this- county?" A. Yes-sir, also all-the records of naturalization that- have-been kept by-the Circuit and-District-Courts. Q. Have-you-made-a memorandum of what"' these re- cords show concerning-the naturalization of certain persons? A. I-have. . Mr. -Brown on-part of Contestant objects to-the testimony of-this witness (1) on-the ground that-it-is incompetent and- immaterial, the-original record books only being admissible as evidence. Q. I-will ask your attention to-the 7 declaratory statement made by James Dunn. State-whether you ever examined the-record of-the naturalization of-such-a-person, and-if so, when-did-you" find that-it-was made? Mr. -Brown ou-part of Contestant objects to-the-question on-the ground that-it-is incompetent and-immaterial/" The- original books themselves are-the-best evidence, and-the witness should-not-be allowed to testify from any document other-than these books themselves. (2) A. I-have examined the-records carefully, and-find that- there-are two James Dunns. One made his declaratory statement on-the 28th of July, 1856 ;' the-other made his de- claratory statement on-the 12th of December, 1866. I also found from-a careful examination of-the naturalization" records of-the District and Circuit-Court Journals from-the beginning, that-is from Journal A down to-the time when- the naturalization records were begun, '" that-there-is-no record of James Dunn's having-been naturalized. Mr. -Brown on-part of Contestant objects to answer of witness on-the ground (3) that-it-is incompetent and-imma- terial, since-it purports to-be-a statement of-the official records, the-same not-being produced. Q. Then we understand' you as testifying that-there-is-no record of any second papers ever having-been issued to any- tiuch-person? A No-sir/' REPORTING STYLE OP SHORT-HANI). Q. To any James Dunn, or James Dunn, Jr.? A. No-sir. Q. What-do-the records show with-reference-to Patrick Dunn? A. On-the 27th of August/" 1866, Patrick Dunn made his declaratory statement, but there-is-no record of-his ever having-been naturalized. Mr. -Brown on-part (4) of Contestant moves that-the answer be stricken out as incompetent and-immaterial, being the statement of what the-records contain, without-the same' being produced. Q. No evidence at-all? A. No-sir, none. Q. Now I-will ask your attention to William Broadhead. A. He filed his declaratory statement on-the // 3rdof Nov.. 1868. There-are no records of-his subsequent naturaliza- tion. Contestant moves to strike same as above/" Q. Is-this-the gentleman known as Uncle Billy Broad- head, who lives in-the poor house? A. The-name is-the-sanie, aud-I suppose it-is-the same- man. (5) Q. Did-you find that any papers had-been issued to Frank Delaware? A. No-sir, I-did-not. Contestant moves to strike same as above/ Q. I-will ask-you if-yxm have gone through these natural- ization and -Court records by-the index, or if -not, how did- you examine, them?" A. I examined them both ways ; first by index, and-then by looking carefully over each page. Q. State-whether-or-not you found any record'" of-the naturalization of Edward Willigrod ; if so, what-is-the date of-it? A. I can state the-book and-the page from-memory. (6) It-is in Minute Book Number One, page fourteen, of-the records of-the County-Court. The-date is somewhere be- tween 1856 and 1858/ REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 283 Contestant moves to strike same as above. Q. Does-the record show that two papers were issued? A. No-sir, but-the record" I-raention is of-the issue of-the second, or official naturalization papers. C. What Court were-they issued from? A. From-the County-Court, when //r/ Wm. C. Smith was judge. Contestant moves to strike same as above. Q. Mr. Johnson, you say you have examined these re- cords from-the beginning, page by page, (7) will-you please state more specifically as-to what-records you-refer? A. I-have examined Journals 1, 2 and 3, of-the Circuit- Court of Marshall-County, arid-Journals A, B and C, of-the District-Court. The-remaining records form a-book called First Paper or Declaratory book/ 7 I examined them all page by page. Q. Are there more Journals than this in-the Circuit- Court? A. Yes-sir. Q. How far does-the third Circuit-Court Journal ex- tend?" 7 A. Down to 1873, when-the first naturalization record was begun. Q. And-the District-Court Journal you have referred to covered the-same period? (8) A. Yes-sir. Q. Mr. Johnson, will-you please bring over the-book con- taining the-record of-the papers issued to Mr. Willigrod? Witness produces Naturalization 7 Record-Book Number 2. Q. Did-you find this-book in-the office and-custody of-the clerk of-the District and Circuit-Courts of-this-County? A. Yes-sir, it-is-one of-the official records, kept in-the office of-the clerk whose deputy I am. Q. Please state-the title and-character of-the 77 third book you now have in-your possession. A. It-is called Minute Book Number 1, of-the Marshall County-Court, kept when Wm. C. Smith was judge. 777 (9078:457) 284 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. 508. SWALES ) IMPANELING vs OF THE WHITE-WATER RAILROAD. \ THE JURY. 6 P n ..V "i J t, > ; v -...! 11 V V ) %-. .f.^p......'rr... > ?' ^ 1 i 1 v^ S. \ 1 ) LESSON XLIX. TBANSCKIPTS AND PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT. 509. All short-hand reports should be securely filed away, either by the Clerk of the Court, or by the stenographer himself. A transcript iu long-hand may be ordered at once, or not till after years ; possibly never. Before making such transcript, the reporter would do well to ascertain whether more than one copy is wanted, since, should he make use of a type-writer, which is much the best plan, two or more copies can be made simultaneously. The testimony of cer- tain witnesses only, or a brief of all the evidence in narra- tive form not containing objections, etc., is sometimes or- dered ; while again, only an abstract is wanted, giving the testimony to which objections were made, together with the rulings and exceptions. In addition to the usual fee allowed for making transcripts, the reporter receives extra compen- sation for the work of making such briefs and abstracts. In all cases, the stenographer has a right to hold the transcript until his fees are paid. 510. Original notes are always taken hurriedly, and need more or less revision and condensation when transcribed into long-hand. In this matter the repoi'ter is allowed some discretion. Answers of witnesses, with few exceptions, should be written as spoken, but the language of interroga- tories should be corrected if ungramatical, and may be abbreviated often with advantage. Lawyers not uncommonly indulge in repetitions which have only the effect of lumber- ing the record, and should in many cases be entirely ex- cluded fi-oni the transcript. 511. Notes should be transcribed in the order taken, and one .side only of the paper be written upon. Ample margin for the notes of counsel should be allowed to remain at the left of each page ; also at the top, so that the sheets may be bound together. Every interrogatory should be numbered, beginning anew with the testimony of each witness. The transci'ipt, when complete, is paged and indexed, and bound firmly into volumes of convenient size. 285 tS6 REPORTING STTLF OF SHORT-HAND. TRANSCRIPT. 512. APPEARANCES. STATE OP INDIANA ] W. H. HARRINGTON, on part of Prosecution. DANIEL W. VOORHEES. LYON. J for Defendant. CROSS-EXAMINATION OP MRS. RACHEL 8TOWE, Continued. Ques. 81. How far were you standing from the corner tree when you heard the report of the pistol? Ans. About as far from it as I am from the stove there (referring to the stove about sixteen feet distant). Ques. 82. You say you heard two shots ; now was it a long or short space of time that elapsed between them? Ans. It seemed to me rather long. Ques. 83. Well, how long? Ans. Perhaps a minute. Ques. 84. You are certain as much as that? Ans. Yes sir, that long anyway. Ques. 85. Will you please indicate the time that elapsed as nearly as you can remember it, by tapping with my knife upon the desk? (Mrs. Stowe taps twice ; time, eighteen seconds, by the reporter's watch). Ques. 86. How far was your boy standing from you at the time? Ans. About as far away from me as that gentleman, (re- ferring to Senator Voorhees). Ques. 87. Were not remarks passed between you and the boy during the time between the shots? Ans. Yes sir, my boy first said Objection. Ques. 88. Did not he know one of the men on horse-back, and did not he say "He has shot " ? Mr. Griffith objects to the question on the ground that it is not proper cross-examination ; also that it misrepre- sents the witness. Objection over-ruled. Defendant excepts. Plate 49* s 5V - \ r IP \ \ \ - r \> V- 888 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 513. The reporter should be prompt in his attendance upon Court, and in the preparation of transcripts ; diligent and accommodating as an officer. It is not unusual for him to be made the confidant of the Judge, and for this reason he should exercise the greater caution, since he is the more subject to interested inquiry. He is expected to make a true and impartial record ; and to avoid all inference of prejudice, it is by far the best policy to say nothing whatever about the case during the trial. He should be trustworthy, and mix suavity with discretion. In the heat of an exciting trial, when the feelings and apprehensions of adverse parties are most awakened, the slightest look, movement, or insinuation on the reporter's part, is liable to be construed into an indication of prejudice or partiality. The utmost care and circumspection are necessary to prevent such reflections, which are sometimes carried even to the extent of a question as to the integrity of the report. 514. PHRASES. Balance-due breach-(of)-contract certiflcate-(of)-marriage circumstantial-evidence common-law contempt-(of)-court Court -ol-law Court-of-Record custom-(of-the) -country laws- (of-the)-land laws-(of)-England learned-judge matter-of- fonn on-the-south-side records-(of-the)-court subject-mat- ter verdict-(of-the)-jury according-(to-the) -evidence place- (of)-business do-you-mean-(to)-say. EXERCISE 49. 515. [Heading, Question and Answer, Objections, etc., to be arranged by the student in the proper manner]. Benj. T. Frederick vs. James Wilson. Appearances : Timothy Brown, Attorney for Contestant. J. H. Bradley, Attorney for Contestee. Contested Election. For the office of Representative in Congress foi y the Fifth District of Iowa. Cause pending in the House of Representatives of the United States of America. Testimony taken before Eldon REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 289 Moran, Stenographer and Commissioner, during the months of February/' March, April and May, 1883. Evidence on part of Contestant. Session at Marshalltown, Iowa, March 5,1883. A. N. French, sworn on-part'" of contestant. You- rnay-state if-you-are the-Auditor of Marshall County, Iowa, and-have-now in-your possession the-poll-books which-were returned to-you from (1) Washington Township? Yes-sir, I-am Auditor, and-have them. Please take-the poll-book, and read so that-the Commissioner can take-it down, giving the-number' of votes that-were cast in-that Township, for each Candidate for Congress at-the November election, 1882. I-understand you want-the certificates just-as" they-were returned? Yes-sir. For Representative in Congress there- were 110 votes cast, of-which James Wilson had 45 ; Benj. T. Frederick 52 /" and David Plainer 13. Is-that-the num- ber of votes for each candidate returned in-the abstract made by-the County canvassers to-the Board of State can- vassers? (2) Yes-sir, the same-number. Please turn to-the poll-book of Marietta Township and-state how-many-votes were returned from-that township for-the office' of Repre- sentative in Congress by-the Trustees of-that township, as shown by-the poll-books, and read it off so that it-may-be taken-down by-the Commissioner/' 'Reading from poll- book) For Representative in Congress, Fifth District, there were 123 ballots, of-which James Wilson had 81 ; Benj. T. Frederick 37 ;'" and David Platner 5. Please turn to-the poll-book of Le-Grande Township, and-state how-many votes were cast for each Candidate at-the last November election, (3) for-the office of Representative in Congress, Fifth Dis- trict (Reading from poll-book) For-the office of-Repi-esen- tative in Congress, Fifth District, there were 263 ballots cast, of-which James Wilson' had 180 ; Benj. T. Frederick 78 ; and David Platner 5. Now state if-your returns made for Washington, Bangor, and-Marietta Townships, were-the same" as shown by-the poll-books I-will-have to look and see. First, I- will ask-you, if -you have-a copy of-the returns made by-the County canvasser"' to-the State-canvasser? 990 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. Yes-sir, I-have. Now state as-to Washington Township, how-many votes for-the office of Representative in Congress were returned to-the State canvassers (4) for-this Township. For James Wilson 45 ; B. T. Frederick 52 ; David Plainer 18. Now state with-reference-to Marietta Township/ James Wilson 81 ; B. T. Frederick 37 ; David Plainer 5. These numbers correspond with-the poll-book. State, also, with- reference-to Le-Grande Township. The schedule shows' 7 James Wilson received 180 votes ; B. T. Frederick 78 ; and- David Platner 5. These numbers are the-same as those I read from-the poll-book. Now state'" with-reference-to Bangor. For-the office of Representative in Congress, there were 89 ballots cast, of- which James Wilson had 75; (5) B. T. Frederick 2; and-David Platner 12. The-abstract also shows Wilson to-have received 75 ; Frederick 2 ; and Plat- ner 12/ EXCUSED. (5955:15 4) LESSON L. SYSTEMS AND IMPKOVEMENTS. 516. Isaac Pitman, inventor of Phonography, the most popular of all short-hand systems, began publishing half a century ago. Within this time the sale of his principal in- struction books may be roughly estimated as follows : The Reporter's Companion, about 145,000 copies ; the Manual, 475,000 ; the Teacher, nearly one and a quarter million. He has also published a dictionary, a phrase-book, and various lesser works. His weekly Journal numbers twenty thousand subscribers. This, however, does not convey an adequate idea of the extent to which the system, of which he was the chief originator, has spread abroad. Various teachers and author?, embracing Mr. Pitman's own brothers and sons, have published books, many of which have met with a large sale. The Manual of Benn Pitman, the chief American REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. 291 author, has sold to the extent of about four hundred thousand copies. The Muiison, Graham, Longley, and a number of other systems, are all Pitmanic, each one however being characterized by certain modifications, or improve- ments, most of which are introduced in this chapter. The Pitman system as a whole, in its present state of perfection, is a growth, the result of almost countless experiments made by conscientious workmen and thoughtful writers. Each author has to some extent modified his own original presen- tation of the system, but none, perhaps, have made so many changes as Mr. Pitman himself. One of the inevitable con- sequences of this gradual developement is that reporters who learned ten, twenty, or thirty years ago, write the system somewhat differently from each other, and a style differing also from the system as it is taught to-day. The system as presented by the inventor is that most employed in England and the/British Provinces. The Benn Pitman system is the one most followed in America. The chief features wherein the English differs from the American Short-hand, are the following: A new sign for h, struck both upwards and downwards ; also different characters for to and y, and compound characters for rch, rj, Ir, wh, hwl; a large initial hook attached to curves for I; a large w-hook, changed to a circle to indicate a preceding s, a somewhat different mark for 01, etc. Within certain limits the straight stems are lengthened to add tr, dr, thr. A final hook attached to a lengthened stem is given force before the added tr or thr is pronounced, as in thunder (lengthened th-n). For illustra- tive words see Ls 1, 2 and 3. The chief differences, however, consist in what is known as the inverted vowel scale, by which the first place dots are make to change places with the third place, it and tah being written as we would write at and tea. The principal effect of this change is this : that many first position words are written in the third position, and vice versa. See L 3. *98 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAXD. 517. KEY. 1. (Isaac Pitman) Heaven hall yes widow torch dirge whisper whalebone. 2. Printer conductor ponder slander thunder color spoil square former. 3. Flesh flame eat tah it at keep king knack. 4. (Munson) Hurry cure do-you pay- your clatter tether to-receive to-trade by-our ought-we. 5. (Graham) Active combative thief leave trial timbrel clerk would-there. 6. I-have or-not but-not but-are-not of- our-own and-of we-were what-would ye-were you- wcre you-would. 7. Explanatory perniciousness in- considerateness examination exasperation episcopacy in- temperance we-were-to-have twenty forty. 8. (Longley) Heap hawk gather has-there is-there building sinfulness have-been. 9. (Scott-Browne) Dated talented mastered re- mitted mentioned help inhale harbor. 10. (Watson) Plat- ter trader damp poke beg puff cling pang. 11. Yoke rambling receiving mason jealousy addition alienation unmarried. 12. (Lindsley) Eat key tay sea oat ought ooze saw taw aid. 13. (Other Authors) Loosest nicest voted invaded charm warm sermon , thrive. 14. Sir Dear- sir mar mortar mat extra. 15. Cap poke papa view love lad do. 518. James E. Munson, author of the Complete Phono- grapher, follows Isaac Pitman in the manner of vowel ex- pression. He also adds a y-hook, attached to straight letters, as in cure. It is employed chiefly, however, in phrases, as do-you, pay-your. A large final hook, when written on the r-hook side of straight stems, expresses tr, dr, thr, as in clatter, tether. He also has a different character for h, and writes words entirely below the line, or in what is called the fourth position, to express a preceding to, as in to-receive. He employs the w and y hooks quite extensively in phrase signs, as in by-your ought-we. L 4. 519. Andrew J. Graham, author of Standard Phonogra- phy, uses a hook similar to Munson 's ter hook to express tivc, and lengthens the n-hook when attached to curved Plate 50* > p ; 8 V_X >.... T Zl 8 L JO ie ^ 13 / 14 \ V L > r i i I .1 I [/ \ \ C 3 c \ - I 294 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORTHAND. stems to express,/" or v, as in thief or leave. When joined to straight stems the r-hook is enlarged to add I, as in trial, timbrel; and the 1-hook is enlarged to add r, as in tumble. , clerk. A short, heavy dash is used in phrases for ther, as in would-there. See L 5. A characteristic feature is a srrics of phrase signs obtained by attaching hooks to vowel word- signs, as in I-have, or-not, but-nol, etc. The coalescents are enlarged to add were and would, as in we-were, what-would, etc. See L 6. It is safe to say that no other system has been elaborated to an equal extent. It is quite perfect in what may be termed the mathematical sense; but there are so many fine turns and delicately contrived characters in his reporting style, that persons only who are hard students, and possess considerable artistic ability, are capable of making a success of it. The .common objection is the un- usual number of contractions, a few of which, selected at random, are given in L 7. 520. Elias Longley, author of the Eclectic Series, has a still different character for h, struck both upwards and downwards. He also uses the tr hook on straight stems, writes vowels by the inverted scale, and adopts the Isaac Pitman I and r hooks. Other features also of his system are shown in L 8. His books are clearly written, and unusually well suited to the purpose of instruction. 521. Scott-Browne. A popular device of this author is the ed-tick, affixed to stems to signify the past tense, as in added, talented, etc. L 9. He modifies h to indicate the added I and r, enlarging the hook to indicate the first, and shading the stem to indicate the second, as in help, harbor. Mr. Scott-Browne has been a close student of the philosophy of short-hand, and his theories are clearly set forth in his text-books. 522. John Watson, of Maryland, has produced an excep- tional book in regard both to the originality of its principles, and the novelty of its teaching. He adopts the inverted .scale, and lengthens all straight stems to add ter, as in platter, trader. He employs a shaded up-stroke for mp, also writes BEPOBTINO STYLE OF SHORT-HAND - 295 the f-hook large, and uses the old f-hook to express k and g. The 1-hook also is made large, and ing inverted when more convenient, as in pang, L 10. He also makes various other changes, a few of which are shown in L 11. 523. D. P. Lindsley, author of Takigraphy, transforms the system completely, making use of the old material in con- structing what is known as the connective vowel system. Vowel signs of such a character are selected that they can be written between stems without the pen being lifted from the paper. Consonant position is not made use of, and hence ruled paper is not strictly necessary in taking notes. In the reporting style, however, most vowels are dropped, and many word-signs and contractions made use of. The simple style is easily learned, and the writing very legible. An obvious disadvantage is that an entirely new style must be learned before the student can report verbatim, or fill a situation requiring a high degree of speed. For illustrative words see L 12. 524. W. W. Osgoodby, author of Phonetic Short-hand, adds a number of improvements, among which are the re- duplicated loop, as in loosest, and the slanting ed-tick, as in voted. See L 13. 525. Curtis Haven employs an entirely original vowel scale, and makes use of consonant position to quite a con- siderable extent. In the consonant alphabet he discards several shaded stems, allowing the light mates to represent both the cognate sounds. He employs a shaded up-stroke forrrn, as in charm, warm. R is expressed by the up-stroke only, the curved sign being used for v, as in thieve. L 13. 526. Prof. J. G. Cross, author of "Eclectic Short-Hand," presents an entirely original system, of which one main feature is that it is not phonetic, but rather what may be termed orthographical, following the old spelling to a large extent. Only a few shaded strokes are used, and there are five consonant positions significant of the principal vowels. These are also provided with stem signs, which are some- times used. The alphabet is derived, not from the circle, 206 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. like the Pitman, but from the ellipse, like the German system of Gabelsberger. The common abbreviations, but not many word-signs, are used. The system is expeditious, but it pos- sesses neither the philosophical basis nor the broad capabili- ties of the Pitman system. For illustrative words see L 14. 527. H. M. Pernin, author of Universal Phonography, presents a system bearing some resemblance to the French system of Duploye. Light lines only are used, the sub- vocals, as 6, d, j, being written longer for distinction. The chief vowels are written connectedly between stems, and consonant position is not made use of. For illustrative words see L 15. 528. There are numerous other authors and teachers, more or less known to fame, who have devoted their efforts to invent new systems or improve the old. A partial list of these is given (American) : Morris, Marsh, Burns, Bishop, Kimball, Day, Eames, Thornton, Dement, Jenkins, Barnes, Rogers, Humphrey, Allen, Howard, Scovil, Boyle. Andrews, Webster, Towndrow, Palmer, et al. OBSERVATIONS. 529. So far as the student has time and disposition to do so, he will find it both agreeable and profitable to examine more closely the various systems, particularly the different Pitman authors. After he has had considerable experience in actual reporting, he may so far as he judges expedient, adopt and incorporate into his style contrivances, hooks, and word and phrase signs of other authors. He will need of course to use discrimination in writing letters, employing only those signs with which his correspondent is familiar. But comparatively little time is required, and considerable advantage may be gained, from learning enough of the dif- ferent authors to enable the student to read the notes and correspondence of other reporters. 530. EXERCISE 50. Practice on the Vocabulary iintil you can write the whole of it at dictation in twenty minutes. VOCABULARY. A Anno Domini A hie-to C ^ (A.D.) l[ / Able-to-glve-lt \ "> Annual ^1 I **~~ t/ Antiquarian Abundant ~ Accomplish \ \ Antiquity ^"^ S ^ 9 ^^ According v \ Anxiety \ \ ** ' _/ Anyhow Accordlng-to Accordiug-to- his-contract c- ^c-^' Anything Apostle rr Y \. According-to- Appear the-instruction Accuracy Ace u rale n n v Appearance Appeared Applied * ^ Acknowledge \ Apply \ \ Acquiesce Acquit Act-of^congress ~~) n^- Appoint Appointed e ^ ""T- Actual Acute / Appointment Appoints ^ * \4 Advantage Zf 1 pprec Advantageous Advertise-iug Advertisement / Apprehend Apprehensive Approve , 1 ~t~> vl^l ^ C Affirmative Are V After CN Aristocrat \^ Afternoon ^v Arrange r Afterward v_ Article Again-and- again ^/ a- As As-a-matter-of- ^ Q^ Ago ^ fact ^ Agriculture All r T^-Tl \ As-fast-as As-great-as o- O Allow (' As-has v> Almighty Almost Almost-always V, V^V^^ As-his As-it As-lt-will ) .....P... Already As-is All-the- world Altogether I/ > As-soon-as Associate O Q_J> I/ Astonish Always Amanuensis Ambiguity (O^^o^^n Astonishment As-well 5 ) c Amendment At An At-all Analogy /-.^ ^ At-all-events _ 1 p p And Angel / -7 At-all-lt8 At-all-times Anguish At-any-rate b l^b 206 nEPOn 77.V3 S TYL F OF STIOR T-HAXD. At-flrat Call At-lt . p Campaign ^"^ D At-length -jr -j -J- Cau-ii At-once <>. Cannot 3 \ Avenue . V^^ \ Average / Can ' i Capable - A i Capital Aware V Care X*" 9 Awful / X- Catholic c V Awhile Cs d Bank-note Baptist Barrier \\ V / Censure Certain Certificate <5 /) Be V Certify | Because Become \ v_ Challenge Change-d t cf ^L Belter-not - Collect-on-de- f 1 Belter-Ulan \ xi . / livery (C.O.I).) *" 1 c \ ^-> V N/ Collector 1 Bevond Bll'l-of-sale n \ ^\ Come Blunder Nr S> Commercial Board Board-ot-trade Brilliancy v -v, V^ Commonwealth Communication Company _n v ^ x ^ Brother Brotherhood But By-the-flrst V-^j ' Comparative' Compliance Comprehend x A_v, By-way -of-lllus- \ v^ t2 Comprehensive (\ o-^ | t ration ir"^ *" Concern V_^ J \_3 Calculate Confession VOCABULARY. 899 Confidential Definition * Confidenual- V V /r ' Degree <- Congesuon J \_s _ Congratulate Connection Conscientious C^ .- *^>\ Deliberation Delight Delinquent k r L >J Consequence Consequent Consequential <^-o , -= Deliver Deliverance Delivery f J f Consider Consideration Consistent 1 1 .p Demonstration Demoralize Demoralization L Consonant Constantly Constitution p p Q ' ~P J Denominate Denomination Denominational J J J {.... ._ Constitution-of- the-U.-S. . Construct Construction u>- vi Denounce Dependent Derivative j- 1 v Constructive ^l 1 Derive I ^ Continue L-/ L>i Describe Continued Convenience Co-operate Correct V^-Nt Descriptive Destiny Determination - Ki Correspond Countenance Counterbalance c $ ^ ~^_9 " Determine Develop Development w \ I V P Endeavor Fact Endless Energy ^r\ W *^^ Failure Faithful Vj^ V. English-lan- I Falsehood [ guage ^_~^_^ v-X\ Familiar ^Tt Enlarge ^-/ X) Fear-of-God \^f\ \- V Enterprise / > Equal Equator Especially ^ ) Feature February Fellow-citizen L i \ \. t Essentially Establlah-ed Establishment \ L ) ) Fellow-creature Few Fewest ^_...^...U- Estate Finally Estliuated-cost Estlmated- ) X- X Finance Finish V Wj> w' welght 1 First ' 1 First-class Estimation Et ctetera (etc.) ^~D P/ Flve-or-slx O-o ^ Eternal Follow \y For ^fc_/^ Eulogy Foreign \^_ i \ /) Europe European } ^'* Frever-and- Ever V V v /^^^ ever Ever-and-ever \. For-instance V V. v Ever las ting For-it \ J VOCABULARY. 801 Forsake For-the-first- tirae For-the-most- part For-the-sake-of Forthwith Fortunate Forward Four-or-flve Franklin Frequent From From-flrst-to- laat Full Fundamental Furniture Future Gave-lt Generation Genial Gentleman Gentlemen Give Give-it Given Glve-us Glorious Glory Good Good-and-bad Govern Government Governor Great-Britain Greater-than Great-extent Guilt Guilty Gypsy uka Had-lt Had-not Hall Hand Hand-in-hand Hcudsome -" ^ Handwriting Handy Happen Happiness Happy Hard Hardware Has lias-Ilia Hath Have Have-hai Have-lf Have-not Hazard He Health Hear Heard Heart Heathen Heaven Height Held Help Hence Herald Herein Heretofore Hesitate Hesitation He-supposed High Higher Highest Highly Highway Him His Hls-ls Historian History Hold Holiness Holy .S* '...ir^l.-A.-.. 1 ' * ^ ^ S s (\ ~^ C ^ 1 r r\ ^ } Z^ 1 ) \i - - ~\ D ^ rf u ~ V^\ o ' ^ V _ ( i_ S ' "1 J"" r ^^ ~ > ^S^ 808 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. Home Honestly Honor r ^ ndivlduality ndolence Indulge ^ r r (a ^ . / Honorable ndustrions Hope How However How-long Howsoever ^-V A ndustry v A "^\ " *\o Infinite A J| nfluence r nfluentlal v_j> ^^nj V-J? nformatlon ~ V" ^ ngenlouB Human In-hlB-descrip- ; ^ ^ 7=s J ^ Human-life tlon / ^ >a Human-nature .. n-hls-estlma- O Humor ^_ ^^ tion In-hls-experl- Hundred f\ *"" ^ ence x^v ^^'^^ \ jj\\. Humble ^"" 1 ^^ o >J ^^ 2*^ slon I f~**^^ In-hls-life ,^ I-am-wllllng Idea v ^~~f ^ ;n-hlB-secret In-his-uaual O" y ^~< It-is-something 1 1 Lord -Jesus- s*~t S\ s o It-is-sumcient L L-s. 1 Christ ( l\Df O "^ GI^~^ D ) Loves-ua It-ought ^^/ Luxurious It-ought-not It-ought-to- have-had ' J t Magazine Magnanimous ^-N_ X-N_T Maintain Its It- will It-will-have L r r Majestic 7- 7 ^ b u Majority It-will have-had It-will-not Malpractice d ^*\ ^~^~~^y It-would r .r Man ^ ^~^i / l u .... . Manager It-would-have- had It-would-not January .-. .. Manner Manuscript Marshall V,Or-\*V Jesus-Christ May-as-well Joint-committee May-be /^~ ^ ^ Journal May-not ^~6 '"a Joyous Junior Just-as -certain Just-as-much-as ...{.... ^ ^- Measure Medium Member Member-ol-the- bar -> -- - ^ Just-as-well-aa / ^/ / Member of-the- \\ ^ ^ /v^ Just-been >o X* 1 " \ Legislature \ o o o Memorandum * Just-had <*'~3 Justlce-of-the- / / o/ Men /^^v Psace Merciful _.-.. C > C Just-say-so 1 V J Mercy 804 REPORTING 3TYLF OF SHORT-HAND. Mere ^^ ^ ^ ,. ' New- York-City Messenger Method / ( Next Next- time T^Z> I^-N Methodlcal-ly Non-appear- Million ^ 7 \^ J ance *}t\ ^_Oi f* Minimum (. ^ >^- >> ^-^ > Non-conductor \ Nor O I ^ Mlnlster-ed ^_ 1 Ministerial s *^J North C-^v /J Ministry s~~**^ f) s~^^ /"I North-America ^ / ^_>^ ^-*Cf ^^~~L-S ^^L^ North-eastern V vi Minority , >. North-west Monarch 1 '"""S North-western ^^^"v C^'v/' vLx 1 Ing J 1 Monthly-report More ' *"" f s\ /^c November More-or-less V/Vr^^-/ Now Number "^ ^^ ^ More-than Mortgage Most-Important Most-likely **-r** Numerous- questions Nutshell Obedience j \ } Mostly C. "N Mr. s-g^ S~~ Obey \ \ V Object Objection \ \ \J Much Much-are Much-qulcker- / 7 /- Objective Obvious V V than "/ / Z_C- D Occur X Much-will Much- will-have Must-be ..f. - / .-.^.-.- Occurrence Of Official. ^ N ^J Must-expect Oh / Must-like ^ n ~^,f~~^ Ohio Must-make S~t! S On 1 C Mv instructions /~n ^_^ ^^ On-either-hand Myself 1 Q ^"^ One-of-the-most J Mystery ^ One-of-the-best <^^z ^-^ Natural-ly Nature *-s One-or-two On-the-one- Near r Nfc- ^ hand f* rv On-the-otber- <; ~ A CL? J Neglect hand Negligent V 1 X/ Negotiation . ^ ^* * (_^/ Only Q__x < \ Onward . O Neighborhood Opens Never Nevertheless Kevertheless-lt- 1 Opinion Opportunity Or <\ k New-Hamp- Bhlre vU- ^-^~v^ ^y^ Organize Ornamental ..I? /^_H. New-York D ^ Or-not VOCABULARY. 805 Other Ought Ouglit-to-have Our-instrnc- tions Our own Ourselves Postal-card Posterity Postmark Post-master Post-office Postal-service Poverty Practicable Practical Recollect Recollection Recommend Recommenda- tion Reconsider Record "\ - - 806 REPORTING STYLE OF SHORT-HAND. ' Reduction X* Seltlsh Reference Reflection /\> / x^ Senior Sensation Q Q -^N -X I Q_C, Reform ' Reformation Regular xv. /v>/~" Sentence Sentiment Set-forth a^_i> ^ C Regularity Regulate Regulation X-1AV-3 Set-off Seven-or-elght Several 1 M ~ Signification n e\ ^ s Remember \ \ Similar ?_ Renounce Similarity Represent-ed Representation /*** /\ /\) Simple Simply <5^^ tf^ tf^ Republic Singular. Requisite Respect /\X-f A Six-or-seven Slander o-rf'V. f\ Respectability \ Some-one 1 Respectable Something Responsible A. A A Sometime s*\s\ /\ 6 ^ (T"N S _./ ^s/ ~N Revelation Revolution \ \ Somewhat South America CO Roll i /Q__. cX South-eastern / &" Romantic ' Speak \ir^ ^ Rule Special Said-to-hare ~Va_^. ,/.... Specially \ \J Salvation ^^ Satisfaction Satisfactory Satisfactory- manner Satisfactory- proof Satlsfy-Hwt " u t~~ Specialty Speech Spirit Spiritual Spoke Spoken M-AJL ^C \ \ Savior Scorn e y *~" Square Squirrel Q , p Scripture X^ ft / Stability \ ^rX l\ Season DA Statesman Secure *~^^ Stenographer f_ t ^"^ > \ Q^_X Self-esteem Stenographic VOCABULARY. 8OT Stenography StenoKraphic- society Stumble -~^ There Therefore There- would- not 9 \ > 9 Subject Subjective Subsequent \ V %, They They-are They-are-not C 3 Such-are Such-are-not 8uch-a-on / 9 S Thev-wlll This-ls Thls-has-never f ^ ^, Such have Such-have-had Such-ought-to- have Such-ought- to- hv-hd Such-were Such-were-not f f Thls-system Thls-will Those Thou Though Three-or four ^ / H-- f ~T~ 1 Such-will Such-would Suifcient ^ -r*~> Throughout Thus Till / r 5 -\ Suggestion Suppress Supremacy xX^ J Till-lt To To-be f x v > ' Surprise Suspension Systematic \o p i *~- To-become Together Told .j^_ r Takes-us Tavern Tedious Lo Lj 1 Too Toward Towards \ i t Telegram Tell Tell-lt p r To-wlt Transcript Treacherous > K } Tell-us Temperament Temperance Temperate Temporal Tendency E U, k k ^*\/ ^ -\ True Try-to-have Tuition Twelve Twist Two 1 j 4 J i C f v Termination Territory Testament V\P V V N WJ.lch-have- had Whlch-oughV- to-have i ..{ Jl. * Whlch-ought- Use (noun) . not Use (verb) Usually -X -_} s 7 I Whlch-not Which- were-not Which-will-not C^^fek C Wilt f 3 (J cX_x We-must-b Wisconsin Were \ Western We*t-Vlrglr.li S" *}/> ^\ 6 Q ON .,, Wisdom With Withdraw ^ c S We-wlll j W- will-not \^^^ Wlth-hlm Within (j (r> What Whatever (j Wlthln-a-week- or-two C^^ *~ ^ When ^ ^ ( i 9 C ^- / V Wlth-me Whence ^. Wlth-iny _ Whenever Without VOCABULARY. 309 With-reference- to With-regard-to Wltu-respect-to "With-whom Witness Woman Women Word Word-of-God Worker World Would Ye Year-s Yearly Yesterday Yet You Against Kmcacy Perfect Mystery Manufacture Manufactory Right-hand Signify You re-rery-truly Young Youngest Your Your-favor Yourself Yourselves Your-Btatement Yours-trmly Youth r APPENDIX. \ SPIRITUAL FREEDOM. ^~t_s \ / U> J "N? /V^V^^X^^^.^/ -V rv / L ) ' 1^1 ' 1 /, +^^ rjr \^^s ? ' ^ ^C-p * ../ Vo L , ' )/\3 v / - "1 o V - .No L..^ L - -P ' 7^1 V, r , FAC SIMILES. Short-hand notes as actually produced at a high rate of speed, present an appearance very different from the char- acters contained in the engraved pages of this book. The higher the speed, the greater the variance from an exact standard. We present a few specimens, but not for criti- cism or imitation. They were executed by teachers in different schools in which this book is used. The transla- tion is: " You may state your name, age, place of residence and occupation; also, whether or not you are acquainted with the plaintiff" in this action." The student, while he may ad- mire the ease with which a stenographer may read very wretched looking notes, should nevertheless stick as close to the standard as possible. No. 1 was written at the rate of 150 words per minute; No. 2, 175 per minute; No. 3, 216; No. 4, 200; No. 5, 200. f "-> / H" u ~l \ s. v^ (311) DEFINITION OF TERMS. Stenography. A. system of rapid writing; Short-band. PhonegrapKg. Sound- writing; a phonetic system of Short-hand. Word-Sign. An abbreviated outline from which some of the conso- nants are omitted. Sign- Word. A word which Is provided with a sign, or abbreviated out- line. Phrateograph. A character expressing more words than one, formed by writing a number of words without lifting the pen. Phrate-^Hgn. An abbreviated phraseograph. Phraseogram. An assemblage of words which are expressed by a phrase-sign. Consonant Stem. -Any letter of the consonant alphabet, whether stand- ard length, shortened or lengthened. Adjvnctive Sign. Any character or expedient, other than the letters of the alphabet, which is employed to express a consonant sound ; e. g., the s-circle, n-hook, st-loop, einp, etc. Verbatim. Word for word. Notes. Matter written in Short-hand ; Stenographic manuscript. IAst- Wordt. Series of words to be written according to the rules which Just precede them. See sections 24 and 54. Speed Sentence. The sentence which is to be written a given number of times in one or two minutes. See sec. 89. Abbreviations. L 1, L 2, L 8, etc., refer respectively to Lines 1. 2, 8. of the engraved plates. Type- Writer. Refers either to a writing machine, or the person who operates it. For distinction, the operator is sometimes called a type- writist, or a type-operator. The name " type-writer," however, as desig- nating the person, is gaining currency, and may well be adopted, since writing machines are usually called by a specific name, as the Remington, Caligraph, Hammond, etc. Typoicript. Refers to type-written manuscript, sometimes called simply "type-writing." The name Typograph has also been applied to the instru- ment itself. SUGGESTIONS. " HAVE FAITH IN SHORT-HAND. There IB probably no other one thing that has caused BO many people to fail in their endeavors to become re- porters as a lack of confidence in Short-hand. Too often we hear begi ti- ners say. I will try it and see whether I can succeed or not.' The young man or woman who, after seeing that thousands of others have m de a success of Short-hand, cannot say, 'I w'M succeed,' had better not -peril time or money upon it, or, in fact, upon anything else that requires a li ;tle study and application. ' Nothing is more absurd than to hear a certain class of people decry- ing Short-hand, when in fact they know nothing at all about it. We ht - known many young people who would have become excellent reporter- , had they not been induced to give up the idea of learning Short-hand by the advice of persons who had never before even heard of Stenography. "The young man or woman who takes up the study of Short-hand will surely be compelled to endure the constant cry that there is an ove>- supply. To be sure there is an ' over-supply ' of Short-hand writers, bo ra there an over-supply of workmen in every industrial pursuit; yet people go on learning the various trades just as though the cry had never been heard. The over-supply comes from that large class who oi.ly do things by halves. We have all heard the cry of an over-supply of law- yers, teachers, carpenters, blacksmiths, etc., yet a good lawyer, teacher or carpenter is never at a loss for something to do. You never hear of a man who stands well up in his business or profession making any com* plaint of the competition which he may have. People who can do their part well are always in demand." "The Stenographer, like everybody else, must, in a certain sense, be a machine. This arises from the fact that in many cases confidential mat- ter of the gravest importance is dictated to him, and unless he exerts the utmost care, he will be apt, inadvertently it may be, to betray a knowledge of his employer's affairs to those who would take advantage of It. Again, it frequently occurs in some kinds of business that the Stenographer is approached for the special purpose of getting him to divulge his employer's intentions or plans. Attempts may even be made to bribe him, in order to secure the desired information. Aside from the moral phase of the question, the Stenographer can by no means afford to betray his employer's secrets to others. Once let it be proved that he has done such a thing, and his prospects as a reporter will be ruined." From "Orm HUNDRED VALUABLE SUGGESTIONS TO SHORT-HAND STUDENTS," by StUby A. Moron, Short-Hand InatituU, Michigan University. SttORT-HfVND DICTIONARY 8KNT POSTPAID TO ANY ADDRESS FOB $1.00 Prepared specially for young stenographers and stu- dents of the Pitman System Handy size; fits the pocket. Dimensions: Thick- ness, 8-8 of an Inch; width, 8 8-4 Inches: length, Q% In- ches; weight, 6 oz. Bound In cloth; stained edges; enameled paper; clear type and engraving; excellent press-work. The book contains 150 pages; 6000 characters rep- resenting all commonly occurring words whose out- lines are doubtful or uneertain. The Intelligent learner does not require a Dictionary of huge size containing thousands of words which are perfectly easy, and ten of thousands of rare words which occur only once in a life-time. The engraved characters and corresponding words are printed two columns to the page and arranged alphabetically. Most common words are easy to write In Short-hand the proper forms being determined at a glance. Such are MAKE, BLAME, TIME, DO, MUSCLE, PRESERVE, MIM- EOGRAPH. To know how to express such words no student ever needs a dictionary. They are omitted from this list because they would only be In the way. Those only are included which are both common and difficult; and since the list Is not lengthy, this little book Is suitable not only as a pocket reference book, but for actual school room use. It will be time well spent If the learner will copy each page a score of times. Get a Pocket Dictionary because It makes hard words easy; it saves labor and prevents discourage- ment; It will make you a better stenographer; because it Is low-priced and amply complete. Published and for sale by THE MOHAX SHORT-HAND Co., ST. Louis, Mo. WOR 1 49 YOU o^ Worse x^ Yawl <\ Worship " Yellow Xl Write Writing f Yes \s\ Yesterday /^-^ Written X- Yet ^ Yield Lxenia ^, Xenophon \^^ Xerxes <^s S Yonder 'C York n YOU Y s^x Young 1 Yacht x^? Youngster O?? Yankee f Your ^-^ ^j Yankton ^ Your-favor Yard S Yarn S^-t Your-last-letter C Yourself RIGHT TO THE POINT. , The beat email Dictionary extant. H. D. CADMAW , Principal Short-hand Department, lleald's Bu&iueu College, San Krunciaco. Most practical series of short-hand text-books ever pnblUhed. W. P. POTTEB. Short-hand Teacher, St. Louis. Best adapted* of all for actual School-room use. LYMAM HAKFOBD, Teacher H.gh School, Watsonville, Calif. Tour Dictionary is just the thing. W. N. PHILIPS, Principal Mas-t-y business College, Montgomery, Ala. . The Reporting Style is admirable the best Short- hand instruction book I ever examined. J NO. C. HUGH, Teacher Femcle College, Mansfield, La. Tour Dictionary is the finest book of the kind I have ever Be--n. KMELINB D. MAHSTON, Teacher, aomerviile, Teuu. The very best text-books on the market. B. E. PABKEK. Prin ipal Department of Business, Otterbein University, tte&terville, Ohio. The Reporting Style is the most practical Short-hand book I have ever seen W. C. HOLMES, Law Sten- ographer, Waycross, Ga. Have tried many books find Moran's Reporting Style to be the be.-t. F. L. HAMLIN, President Col- lege of Commerce, East St. Louis, 111. The handy little Sign-book is especially useful. J. M. BAUNKS, Short-hand Teacher, St. Louis. Have ased the Reporting Style some years find It very satisfactory. S. L. OLVKB. Principal St. LouiB Commercial College. Tour Dictionary gives eminent satisfaction. -E. H. FRITCU, Principal Southwestern Business College, St. Louis. TheReporiing Style is superior to any other text- book on the market ased it eight years. ELIZABETH IRISH. University Business College, Iowa City. Tour Short-hand instruction book was last evening adopted for use in our Hi^h School W. W. CHAL- MXBS, Snpt. of Instruction, Toledo, O. Ths Reporting Style is eminently practical con- venient for the teacher, stimu ating to the student. F. V. BBOCK, Teacher High School, Evansville, Ind. No other Short-hand text-book even approaches the Reporting Style in thoroughness, clearness and directness M. O. GBAYK?, Principal Normal Col- lege, I'et-.skey, Mich. PtTBLISHBD BY MORAN SHORT-HAND COMPANY SAINT LU1S, U. S, A. PRICE 25 CENTS. MORAN'S Shorthand Sign-Book. FITS YOUR VEST POCKET o Contains all the abbreviated Word and Phrase Signs in the Pilman Sys- tem. Arranged both Alphabetically and in Lessons. Since all v.hese characters are to be memorized, it requires no argument to convince you that it is a sensible plan always to have this little Sign-book with you to refer to and study spare hours. It is complete, handy, cloth-bound. The demand for it proves its popu- larity, We have sold upwards of 30,000 of these wonderful little book- lets. They are used regularly in many of the best Colleges, such as The Heald Business College Chain, Calif. The Ann Arbor High School. Lyons Business College, Terre Haute, Ind. City High School, East St. Louis, 111. Caswell School of Short-hand, New Bed- ford, Mass, Fettipas School of Short-hand, Halifax, Nova Scotia. CentralBusiness College, St. Louis. Johnson Business College, Ft. Madison, la. The very idea of a Sign-Book is our own invention, the popularity of which is attested by the number of imitations. The Moran Sign-Book, however, will continue to be the standard. Send the price, 250, in stamps. ORDER TO-DAY. Address MORAN SHORT-HAUD Co.? 1523 Hickory St. ST. LOUIS. LETTER-WRITING CLUB. Membership, one year 50c Persons studiously Inclined, seeking self-Improve- ment, may become members, and are Introduced by card to other members with whom they may cor- respond, discussing some topic of mutual interest. In this way the habit Is formed of study, reflection and the expression of thought in good language. The way to learn Letter-writing is to write letters. As a business qualification and social accomplish- ment, the art of letter-writing stands at the head. In this age it is simply indispensable. A well-written, clearly composed, intelligible letter, Is the golden key which unlocks the gates leading to business success and social preferment. The practice of corresponding with Intellectual friends is a source of pleasure, profit and encourage- ment. The Club numbers hundreds of members and the enrollment Is growing constantly. The purpose of this 'Bureau is to enable students and others to become acquainted, in order that they may discuss on paper the subjects studied, also various topics of mutual interest- Through this medium any earnest student may se- cure one or more desirable correspondents for the purpose of exchanging opinions, examining one an- other's exercises, comparing notes and giving mutual encouragement. Skill in letter-writing, a ready knowledge of English composition, accuracy of expression, self-reliance and the habit of Independent thought, are amongst the favorable results attained. When applying for membership, give your full name and address, age, occupation, educational advance- ment, naming branch of study in which you are most Interested. Address orders and inquiries to the CENTRAL BUSINESS COLLEGE, ST. Louis. DEMAND FOR SHORT- HAND TEACHERS. A practical knowledge of Short-hand and Typewrit- ing is so useful and so great a personal convenience to business men, professional people, teachers, students, almost everyone in fact, that it is not surprising that millions of people are wanting to learn. Teachers are scarce. Stenography is now taught in the High Schools of all the leading cities, and many smaller cities and towns are wanting instructor^; but they are not to be had. 1 do not hesitate to recommend educated young people to qualify as Short-hand teacherg; providing of course'you have a natural bent for the teaching profes- sion. When you become a skillful Short-hand In- structor, profitable employment is assured. The work is interesting and affords ample scope for promotion- The teachers are paid from $50 to $150 a month. We conduct a special Normal Class in which stu- dents are fitted for positions as teachers of Sten- ography. Through our Book Publishing business we have frequent calls for competent instructors. It 18 simply a matter of business advantage for us to fur- nish teachers who are qualified and able to render satisfaction. In most instances it is required that the teacher be reasonably well acquainted with the series of books we publish. If you wish to become a Short- hand teacher, attend our Normal Class, conducted by Eldon Moran, author, or take i special course by mall. Terms very reason- able. In most every instance we have been able to se- cure desirable positions for those finishing this course. For particulars address MORAN SHORT-HAND Co., ST. Louis, Mo. +* AFFORDING THE YOUNG * Inspiration XCntertaJnment; Instruction SELF-HELPER A MAGAZINE OF OPTIMISM AND SELF-BETTERMENT. PUBLISHED MOlfTHLY IN THK INTEREST OF MORAN-PITMAN SHORT-HAND STUDENTS POPULAR EDUCATION, HOME STUDY, SELF-HELP SHORT-HAND DEPARTMENT CONDUCTED PERSON- ALLY BY ELDON MORAN, EDITOR Forty-eight pages. Handy size. Snbsc-'- : -r. ririce, 25c. a year (stamps) Send 2-cent stamp r~ ..:. . -opy. ADDRESS The SELF-HELPER PUB. CO., SAINT LOUIS, U. 8. A. ^M OUR SPECIALTY- X^x- 3 ** . _J OOtiTLiEGEJ OATAIXXJS SCHOOLi JOURNALS FOLDERS TEACHERS' TESTIMONIALS LEAFLETS PORTRAIT OA.RDS ^- -J OFFICE STATIONBRT ^GENERAL JOB PRINTING-- SEND FOR ESTIMATES AND PRICES. No matter whit you may want in the printing line, send us a brief description of your requirements, and a reasonable and prompt estimate will be furnished. Have on hand extensive supply of educa- tional cuts, Shorthand engravings, etc., for free use of patrons. HOME PRINTING COMPANY, . LOUIS. MO. UNIVERSUTY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY Los Angeles This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. r Form L9-25r;i-9,'47(A5618)444 UNIVERSITY ol CALIFORNIA AT UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY A 000137187 1 _ > /. . ^;- , AS M?93r 1909